Yamaha MONTAGE Reference Manual MONTAGE6/7/8 En Rm A0

User Manual: Yamaha MONTAGE6/7/8 Reference Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 187 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Contents
Using the MONTAGE Manuals
Basic Structure
Reference

MUSIC SYNTHESIZER

Contents

Using the MONTAGE Manuals ..................................2

Basic Structure 3

Functional Blocks ......................................................3

Tone Generator Block................................................4

Tone Generator block ...................................................... 4

A/D Input Block ........................................................10

Sequencer Block ......................................................10

Arpeggio Block.........................................................11

Arpeggio categories....................................................... 11

Sub categories............................................................... 11

Arpeggio Type Name..................................................... 12

Arpeggio-related settings............................................... 13

Arpeggio playback types................................................ 15

Motion Sequencer Block .........................................16

Effect Block ..............................................................18

Effect structure............................................................... 18

Effect connection ........................................................... 19

About the Vocoder Effect............................................... 19

Envelope Follower Block.........................................20

Controller Block .......................................................21

Keyboard ....................................................................... 21

Pitch Bend wheel ........................................................... 21

Modulation wheel........................................................... 21

Ribbon Controller........................................................... 21

Assignable Switches...................................................... 21

Knobs/Control Sliders .................................................... 22

Super Knob.................................................................... 22

Internal Memory .......................................................22

Reference 24

Display (touch panel) configuration ...................... 24

Performance Play (Home)....................................... 26

Motion Control......................................................... 28

Mixing ....................................................................... 44

Scene........................................................................ 49

Play/Rec ................................................................... 54

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit........................................ 58

Element Common Edit (Common) .................................58

Element Edit (Element) ..................................................94

Element All (All Element) .............................................117

Drum Part Edit ....................................................... 119

Key Common Edit (Common) ......................................119

Key Edit (Key) ..............................................................126

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit ........................................ 131

Operator Common Edit (Common) ..............................131

Operator Edit (Operator) ..............................................141

Common/Audio Edit (Common/Audio)................ 145

Category Search.................................................... 161

Performance Category Search.....................................161

Arpeggio Category Search (Arp Category Search)......163

Waveform Category Search (Waveform Search).........164

Utility ...................................................................... 165

Live Set................................................................... 183

Live Set ........................................................................183

Live Set Edit (Edit) .......................................................184

Live Set Register (Register).........................................186

Connecting an iPhone or iPad ............................. 187

Reference Manual

MONTAGE Reference Manual 2

Using the MONTAGE Manuals

Your MONTAGE6/MONTAGE7/MONTAGE8 synthesizer comes with four different reference guides — the Owner’s Manual, the

Reference Manual (this document), the Synthesizer Parameter Manual, and the Data List. While the Owner’s Manual is

packaged together with the synthesizer as a hardcopy booklet, this Reference Manual, the Synthesizer Parameter Manual, and

the Data List are available for download from our web page as PDF documents.

Owner’s Manual (hardcopy booklet)

Describes how to set up your MONTAGE6/MONTAGE7/MONTAGE8 and how to perform basic operations.

This manual explains the following operations.

• Quick Guide — Selecting Performances

• Quick Guide — Playing the Keyboard

• Quick Guide — Creating Your Own Live Sets

• Quick Guide — Editing the Settings

• Recording and Playback

• Using as a Master Keyboard

• Connecting a Microphone or Audio Equipment

• Making Global System Settings

• Connecting External MIDI Instruments

• Using a Connected Computer

• Saving/Loading Data

Reference Manual (this PDF document)

Describes the internal design of your MONTAGE6/MONTAGE7/MONTAGE8 and the various parameters that can be adjusted

and set.

Synthesizer Parameter Manual (PDF document)

Explains the Part parameters, effect types, effect parameters, and MIDI messages that are used for synthesizers incorporating

the Yamaha AWM2 and FM-X tone generators. Read the Owner’s Manual and Reference Manual first and then use this

parameter manual, if necessary, to learn more about parameters and terms that relate to Yamaha synthesizers.

Data List (PDF document)

Provides lists such as the Waveform List, Performance List, Effect Type List, Arpeggio Type List, as well as reference materials

such as the MIDI Implementation Chart.

Using the Reference Manual

• Using the display name tabs along the upper part of each page from the

Reference section, you can jump to the page for parameter

explanations of the corresponding display.

• You can click on any page number from the Table of Contents or within

descriptive text to jump to the corresponding page.

• You can also click on desired items and topics you want to refer to in the

“Bookmarks” index to the left of the main window, and jump to the

corresponding page. (Click the “Bookmarks” tab to open the index if it is

not displayed.)

• If you want to find information on a specific topic, function or feature,

select “Find” or “Search” from the Adobe Reader “Edit” menu and enter

a key word to locate the related information anywhere in the document.

NOTE The most-recent version of Adobe® Reader® can be downloaded from the

following web page.

http://www.adobe.com/products/reader/

NOTE The names and positions of menu items may vary according to the version

of Adobe Reader being used.

Information

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat

different from those on your instrument.

• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

• iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.

Select the display name tab Select the function

MONTAGE Reference Manual 3

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

Basic Structure

Functional Blocks

The MONTAGE6/MONTAGE7/MONTAGE8 system consists of eight main functional blocks: Tone

Generator, A/D Input, Sequencer, Motion Sequencer, Arpeggio, Controller, Effect, and Envelope Follower.

AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2)

This instrument is equipped with an AWM2 tone generator block. AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2)

is a synthesis system based on sampled waves (sound material), and is used in many Yamaha

synthesizers. For extra realism, each AWM2 Voice uses multiple samples of a real instrument’s

waveform. Furthermore, a wide variety of parameters—envelope generator, filter, modulation, and

others—can be applied.

MIDI IN AUDIO IN AUDIO OUTMIDI OUT

[USB TO HOST]

MIDI [OUT]

[USB TO HOST]

MIDI [IN]

[USB TO HOST]

A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R]

[USB TO HOST]

OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R]

ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R]

Controller Block (page 21)

Keyboard

Controllers

(such as Super Knob)

Tone Generator (page 4)

AWM2 Tone Generator

FM-X Tone Generator

16 Parts

Performances

Sequencer Block

(page 10)

16-Track

MIDI Sequencer

Songs

Effects (page 18)

System Effects

17 Insertion Effects

Element EQ

Part EQ

Master Effect

Master EQ

A/D Input

(page 10)

Motion Sequencer Block

(page 16)

Envelope

Follower Block

(page 20)

Arpeggio Block

(page 11)

Arpeggio Playback x 8

Preset Arpeggio

User Arpeggio

Computer External MIDI equipment Computer Microphone,

audio equipment,

etc.

Computer Powered

speakers, etc.

Control Message Flow

Audio Signal Flow

MONTAGE Reference Manual 4

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

Tone Generator Block

The tone generator block is what actually produces sound in response to the MIDI messages received

from the Sequencer block, Controller block, Arpeggio block and from the external MIDI instrument. The

MIDI messages are assigned to sixteen independent channels, and the instrument is capable of

simultaneously playing sixteen separate Parts, via the sixteen MIDI channels. However, the sixteen-

channel limit can be overcome by using separate MIDI “ports,” each supporting sixteen channels. The

tone generator block of this instrument can handle MIDI messages over Port 1.

Tone Generator block

A Performance is a single set of sounds consisting of multiple Parts. You can change sounds as desired by

selecting the appropriate Performance. Each Performance has two types of parameters; parameters

unique to each Part and parameters common to all Parts. You can edit the entire Performance in the

Common/Audio Edit display (page 145).

A Performance consists of 16 Parts and you can create Performances (in which multiple Parts or Parts are

combined—in a layer, or in other configurations) using the keyboard.

Internally, there are three Part types: Normal Parts (AWM2), Normal Parts (FM-X), and Drum Parts. Normal

Parts (AWM2) are mainly pitched musical instrument type sounds that can be played over the full range of

the keyboard. Normal Parts (FM-X) are also mainly pitched musical instrument type sounds, using FM

synthesis. Drum Parts are mainly percussion/drum sounds that are assigned to individual notes. A Normal

Part (AWM2) can consist of up to eight Elements, a Normal Part (FM-X) can consist of up to eight

Operators, and a Drum Part can consist of up to 73 Drum Keys.

An Element/Operator/Drum Key is the basic, smallest unit for a Part. By combining multiple Elements/

Operators/Keys, Parts can be created to produce even more realistic sounds or various richly textured

types of sound. Each Part is created by editing parameters unique to each (Element Edit parameters/

Operator Edit parameters/Key Edit parameters) and parameters common to all the Elements/Operators/

Keys (Element Common Edit, Operator Common Edit, and Key Common Edit parameters.)

NOTE For instructions on editing a Normal Part (AWM2), see page 58. For instructions on editing a Normal Part (FM-X),

see page 131. For instructions on editing a Drum Part, see page 119.

FM-X

This synthesizer also features an FM-X tone generator, in addition to the AWM2 block. The

abbreviation “FM” of FM-X stands for “frequency modulation,” which is a special tone generation

system that uses the frequency of one waveform to modulate another waveform, in order to produce a

completely new one. In this synthesizer, there are eight FM Operators and a full 88 different Algorithm

types. By changing the operator combination patterns, controlling the modulation with other

parameters such as levels and envelopes, and using high-quality filters, effects, and EQ commonly

with AWM2, you can create richly textured sounds that change in a highly complex fashion.

Performances

Part structure of a Performance

Parts

MONTAGE Reference Manual 5

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

Normal Parts (AWM2)

These Parts are played conventionally from the

keyboard, with standard pitches sounding for each key,

generated by AWM2. A Normal Part consists of up to

eight Elements. Depending on the settings in the Part

Edit, these Elements are sounded simultaneously, or

different Elements are sounded according to the note

range, velocity range and the XA (Expanded

Articulation) settings (page 6).

The illustration shows an example of a Normal Part (AWM2). Since the six Elements here are distributed

across both the note range of the keyboard and the velocity range, a different Element sounds depending

on which note you play and how strongly you play it. In the velocity distribution, Elements 1, 3 and 5 sound

when playing the keyboard softly, while Elements 2, 4 and 6 sound when playing it strongly. In the note

distribution, Elements 1 and 2 sound in the lower range of the keyboard, Elements 3 and 4 sound in the

middle range, and Elements 5 and 6 sound in the higher range. In the velocity distribution, Elements 1, 3

and 5 sound when playing the keyboard softly, while Elements 2, 4 and 6 sound when playing it strongly. In

a practical example of this in use, a piano Part could be composed of six different samples. Elements 1, 3

and 5 would be the sounds of the piano played softly, over the respective note ranges, while Elements 2, 4

and 6 would be strongly played sounds, for each respective note range. Actually, this instrument is even

more flexible than this, since it allows up to eight independent Elements.

Normal Parts (FM-X)

These Parts are also played conventionally from the keyboard, with standard pitches sounding for each

key, generated by FM synthesis. The sound for a Normal Part (FM-X) is created by modulating a frequency

of a fundamental waveform with another waveform. An operator that generates a fundamental waveform is

a “carrier,” and an operator that modulates these waveforms is a “modulator.” The combination of a

number of Operators is called “Algorithm.”

When the waveform output from the Operator is a simple sine wave, no harmonics are included other than

the fundamental tone. However, you can create harmonics by modulating the waveform with other

Operators. How harmonics can be created depends on the Modulators’ output levels and the frequency

rates of Carriers and Modulators. On the other hand, the basic pitch is determined by Carrier’s frequency,

and the output level is determined by the Carrier’s output level. The figure described below shows a basic

way to create FM sound by using an analog synthesizer.

Although the figure described above shows waveforms which are generated by two operators, the

MONTAGE has eight Operators. The combination of a number of Operators is called an “Algorithm” and

this synthesizer has parameters for setting the Algorithm.

Drum Parts

Drum Parts are mainly percussion/drum sounds

that are assigned to individual notes on the

keyboard (C0 to C6). Unlike Elements, a Drum

key is equivalent to the corresponding note,

meaning that you cannot change its range.

Drum or percussion sounds are assigned to

each Drum Key. You can create various types of

Drum Parts by changing the drum or percussion sound assigned to each key and edit the parameters

such as pitch and EG.

Normal Parts (AWM2), Normal Parts (FM-X), and Drum Parts

Velocity

Element 1

Element 2

Element 3

Element 4

Element 5

Element 6

Modulator OP

Frequency ratio of the

Modulator and the Carrier

determines the base waveform

including specific harmonics by

the Oscillator.

Modulator output level

determines the Cutoff

Frequency of the Filter.

Carrier OP

Modulation Modulator envelope determines

the Filter envelope.

Carrier frequency determines

the pitch of the Oscillator.

Carrier output level

determines the volume

by using the amplifier. Carrier envelope determines

the amplifier envelope.

C0 C1 C6

Individual drum

sounds

(different for

each key)

MONTAGE Reference Manual 6

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

Expanded Articulation (XA) is a tone generation system that provides greater performance flexibility and

acoustic realism. This feature allows you to more effectively recreate realistic sound and natural

performance techniques—such as legato and staccato—and provides other unique modes for random

and alternate sound changes as you play.

Realistic legato performance

This instrument more accurately reproduces a legato effect by allowing specific Elements to be sounded

when playing legato and other Elements to be played normally (with the XA Control parameter settings

“Normal” and “Legato”).

Authentic note release sound

The MONTAGE reproduces these special, characteristic sounds by setting the XA Control parameter of

certain Elements to “Key Off.”

Subtle sound variations for each note played

The MONTAGE more accurately reproduces these subtle sound variations by using the XA Control

parameter settings “Cycle” and “Random.”

Switching among different sounds to recreate the natural performance on an

acoustic instrument

Acoustic instruments have their own unique characteristics—even specific, unique sounds that are

produced only at certain times in a performance. These include the flutter tonguing on a flute or the

playing of high harmonics on an acoustic guitar. The MONTAGE recreates these by allowing you to switch

between the sounds while you play—using the [ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] buttons and the XA Control

parameter settings, “A.SW1 On,” “A.SW2 On” and “A.SW Off.”

NOTE You can turn the [ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] button on or off also by transmitting the Control Change number

specified in the Common/Audio Edit display ([Control]  [Control Number]) (page 153) from an external device.

New sounds and new styles of playing

The highly versatile functions above can be applied effectively not only to acoustic sounds but also to

synthesizer and electronic Parts as well. The XA feature opens up enormous potential for realizing

authentic sounds, performing expressively and coming up with creative new styles of playing.

The Motion Control System is a completely new feature for variably controlling Motions (rhythmical,

multidimensional sound changes) in real time. This amazingly powerful feature dramatically and

dynamically alters the sounds of the instrument in new, never-heard-before ways—changing texturally,

rhythmically with the beats, providing cool, colorful lighting effects, and responding expressively to your

creative passion. The Motion Control System has three main functions:

Super Knob:

For creating multi-dimensional sonic changes, and enhancing those changes with colorful, continually

shifting lighting changes. Multiple parameters can be controlled simultaneously.

Motion Sequencer:

For continually variable sound changes. The powerful Motion Sequencer feature lets you dynamically

change sounds by operating Parameters depending on sequences created in advance. It provides real

time control for changing sounds depending on various sequences such as Tempo, Arpeggio, or the

rhythm of external connected devices.

Envelope Follower:

Envelope Follower is a function for detecting the volume envelope of the input signal waveform and

modifying sounds dynamically.

NOTE Envelope Follower can be controlled not only by the audio signal from an external device, but also by the output

of all Parts.

Expanded Articulation (XA)

Motion Control System

MONTAGE Reference Manual 7

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

For details on the Motion Control, refer to the website below:

http://www.yamaha.com/montage/

Motion Control System Structure

• Continuous control of

Motion changes

• Switch between Motions

• Trigger, Hold

Control the Motion

Sequencer in real time

AUDIO BEAT

• Part 1 – 16

• A/D Input Part

• Audio Beat Sync

• External MIDI

• Internal Tempo

Envelope Follower Motion Sequencer Super Knob

Rhythmic change Automation

Multi-dimensional

sonic change

Tone generator

Effect

MONTAGE Reference Manual 8

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

Elements/Drum Keys/Operators are the smallest “building blocks” in the MONTAGE that comprise a Part.

These small sound units can be built, enhanced and processed by a variety of traditional synthesizer

parameters, such as Pitch EG, Filter EG, Amplitude EG, and LFO (shown below).

Oscillator

This unit allows you to assign the waveform (or basic sound material) to each Element/Operator/Key.

Oscillator-related parameters can be set as follows.

• For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts

[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Osc/Tune] (page 94, page 126)

• For Normal Parts (FM-X)

[EDIT]  Part selection  Operator selection  [Form/Freq] (page 141)

Pitch

This unit allows you to control how the pitch changes over time. Pitch-related parameters can be set as

follows.

• For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts

[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Osc/Tune] (page 94, page 126)

• For Normal Parts (FM-X)

[EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Pitch/Filter] (page 134)

Parameters related to Pitch EG can be set as follows.

• For Normal Parts (AWM2)

[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Pitch EG] (page 98)

• For Normal Parts (FM-X)

[EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Pitch/Filter] (page 134)

Filter

This unit modifies the tone of the sound by cutting the output of a specific frequency portion of the sound.

Also, by setting the FEG (Filter Envelope Generator), you can control how the Cutoff Frequency of the Filter

changes over time. Parameters related to Filter and Filter EG can be set as follows.

• For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts

[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Filter] (page 100, page 128)

• For Normal Parts (FM-X)

[EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Pitch/Filter] (page 134)

Elements, Drum Keys and Operators

LFO

Low Frequency Oscillator

OSC (Oscillator)

Waveform (AWM2)

PITCH

Controls the pitch of

the sound.

Pitch EG

(Pitch Envelope

Generator)

FILTER

Changes the tonal

quality of the

sound.

AMP

Controls the output

level (amplitude) of

the sound.

Filter EG

(Filter Envelope

Generator)

Amplitude EG

(Amplitude Envelope

Generator)

MONTAGE Reference Manual 9

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

Amplitude

This unit controls the output level (amplitude) of the Element/Drum Key/Operator.

Parameters related to Amplitude and Amplitude EG can be set as follows.

• For Normal Parts (AWM2)

[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Amplitude] (page 108)

• For Drum Parts

[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Level/Pan] (page 129)

• For Normal Parts (FM-X)

[EDIT]  Part selection  Operator selection  [Level] (page 143)

LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)

As its name suggests, the LFO produces a wave of a low frequency.

These waves can be used to vary the pitch, filter or amplitude of each Element/Operator to create effects

such as vibrato, wah and tremolo. There are two LFO types: Part LFO, which is common to all Elements/

Operators, and Element LFO, which is unique for each Element.

Parameters related to Part LFO can be set as follows.

• For Normal Parts (AWM2)

[EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Mod/Control]  [Part LFO] (page 85)

• For Normal Parts (FM-X)

[EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Mod/Control]  [Part LFO] or [2nd LFO]

(page 138)

Parameters related to Element LFO can be set as follows.

[EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Element LFO] (page 113)

Maximum Polyphony

Maximum polyphony refers to the highest number of notes that can be sounded simultaneously from

the internal tone generator of the instrument.

The maximum polyphony of this synthesizer is 128 for each AWM2 and FM-X. When the internal tone

generator block receives a number of notes exceeding the maximum polyphony, previously played

notes are cut off. Keep in mind that this may be especially noticeable with Parts not having decay.

Furthermore, the maximum polyphony applies to the number of Elements/Drum Keys used, not the

number of Parts. When Normal Parts (AWM2) that include up to eight Elements are used, the

maximum number of simultaneous notes may be less than 128.

MONTAGE Reference Manual 10

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

A/D Input Block

This block handles the audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. Various parameters

such as volume, pan, and effect can be set for the audio signal and the sound is output together with other

Parts. An Insertion Effect, the System Effects, the Master Effects, and the Master EQ can be applied to the

audio signal input via the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

Parameters related to the A/D Input block can be set as follows.

[PERFORMANCE]  [Mixing] (page 44)

[EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Audio In]  [Mixing] (page 147)

The Effect which is applied to the audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks can be set as

follows.

[EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Audio In]  [Routing] (page 148)

The gain of the audio signal from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks can be adjusted via the A/D INPUT

[GAIN] knob on the panel. Moreover, the on/off setting of the audio signal from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/

[R] jacks can be turned on/off via the A/D INPUT [ON/OFF] button.

[UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Audio I/O]  “A/D Input” (page 168)

Sequencer Block

This lets you create Songs by recording and editing your performances as MIDI data (from the controller

block or an external device), allowing you to play the data back with the tone generator block.

A Song is created by recording your keyboard performance as MIDI sequence data to individual Tracks.

The MONTAGE can store up to 64 Songs.

This is a memory location on the sequencer where your musical performances are stored. One Part can be

recorded to one track. Since the MONTAGE has 16 tracks for one Song, you can record and play back a

16-Part performance.

You can record your keyboard performance to the Song. You can record knob operations, controller

operations and Arpeggio playback as well as your keyboard playing to the specified Track as MIDI events.

Your keyboard performance and controller/knob operations will be recorded to the Track when the

corresponding Keyboard Control Switch for the Part is turned ON.

NOTE The Control Change messages and Parameter Change messages can be recorded by operating the Knobs. For

details on Control Change messages, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

NOTE For detailed instruction, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

Songs

Tracks

MIDI recording

MONTAGE Reference Manual 11

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

Arpeggio Block

This block lets you automatically trigger musical and rhythmic phrases by simply pressing a note or notes

on the keyboard. Yamaha’s Arpeggio sequence also changes in response to the actual notes or chords

you play, giving you a wide variety of inspiring musical phrases and ideas—both in composing and

performing.

Arpeggio categories

The Arpeggio types are divided into 18 categories (including “No Assign” and “Control/Hybrid Seq”) as

listed below. The categories are based on instrument type.

Sub categories

The Arpeggio categories are divided into the sub categories listed below. Because the sub categories are

listed based on the music genre, it is easy to find the sub category appropriate for your desired music

style.

NOTE In the Category Search display, the Sub Categories marked with an asterisk (*) are displayed only when

“Control/Hybrid Seq” is selected as the Category type.

Arpeggio Type Category List

Piano Piano Pad Pad/Choir

Keys Keyboard SynCp Syn Comp

Organ Organ CPerc Chromatic Perc

Gtr Guitar Dr/Pc Drum/Perc

Bass Bass S.FX Sound FX

Str String M.FX Musical FX

Brass Brass Ethnc Ethnic

WW Woodwind --- No Assign

SynLd Syn Lead Ct/Hb Control / Hybrid Seq

Arpeggio Type Sub Category List

Rock Rock World World

Pop Rock Pop Rock General General

Ballad Ballad No Assign No Assign

Chill Chillout / Ambient Filter Filter *

Hip Hop Hip Hop Exprs Expression *

Funk Funk Pan Pan *

Modern R&B Modern R&B Mod Modulation *

Classic R&B Classic R&B PBend Pitch Bend *

House House / Dance Pop Assign Assign 1/2 *

Techno Techno / Trance Comb Comb *

Jazz Jazz / Swing Zone Zone Velocity *

D&B D&B / Breakbeats Z.Pad Zone Vel for Pad *

Latin Latin

MONTAGE Reference Manual 12

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

Arpeggio Type Name

The Arpeggio Types are named according to certain rules and abbreviations. Once you understand these

rules and abbreviations, you’ll find it easy to browse through and select the desired Arpeggio Types.

Arpeggio types with “_N” at the end of the type name (example: HipHop1_N)

These Arpeggios are for using with the Normal Part, and Arpeggios with complex notes can be created

even when triggered by one note (page 15).

Arpeggio types with “_C” at the end of the type name (example: Rock1_C)

These Arpeggios are for using with the Normal Part, and correct Arpeggios can be created corresponding

to the chord you play (page 15).

Arpeggio types with a normal name (example: UpOct1)

In addition to the above types, there are three playback types: the Arpeggios created for use of Normal

Parts and played back using only the played notes and their octave notes (page 15), the Arpeggios

created for use of Drum Parts (page 15), and Arpeggios containing mainly non-note events (page 16).

Arpeggio types with “_AF1”, “_AF2”, or “_AF1&2” at the end of the type name

(example: Electro Pop AF1)

When these Arpeggios are played, both of [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are automatically turned

ON and the phrase starts playback.

Arpeggio types with [Mg] at the beginning of the type name (example:

[Mg]HardRock1)

These Arpeggios are for using with a Mega Voice.

The Arpeggio Type List in the Data List PDF document contains the following columns.

NOTE Note that this list is for illustration purposes only. For a complete listing of the Arpeggio Types, see the Data List

PDF document.

1Main Category

Indicates an Arpeggio Main Category.

2Sub Category

Indicates an Arpeggio Sub Category.

3ARP No (Arpeggio Number)

Indicates the Arpeggio type number.

4ARP Name (Arpeggio Name)

Indicates the Arpeggio Name.

Mega Voices and Mega Voice Arpeggios

Normal sound uses velocity switching to make the sound quality and/or level of a Part change

according to how strongly or softly you play the keyboard—giving greater authenticity and natural

response to these Parts. However Mega Voices have a very complex structure with many different

layers that are not suitable for playing manually. Mega Voices were developed specifically to be

played by Mega Voice Arpeggios to produce incredibly realistic results. You should always use Mega

Voices with Mega Voice Arpeggios.

Main

Category

ARP

No. ARP Name Time

Signature Length Original

Tempo Accent Random

SFX Sound Type

ApKb Rock 1 MA_70s Rock _ES 4 / 4 2 130 Acoustic Piano

ApKb Rock 2 MB_70s Rock _ES 4 / 4 1 130 :

ApKb Rock 3 MC_70s Rock 4 / 4 2 130

ApKb Rock 4 MD_70s Rock 4 / 4 4 130

ApKb Rock 5 FA_70s Rock 4 / 4 1 130

ApKb Rock 6 FB_70s Rock _ES 4 / 4 1 130

ApKb Rock 7 FC_70s Rock _ES 4 / 4 2 130

MONTAGE Reference Manual 13

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

5Time Signature

Indicates the time signature or meter of the Arpeggio type.

6Length

Indicates the data length (amount of measures) of the Arpeggio type. When the Loop parameter*1 is

set to “off,” the Arpeggio plays back for this length and stops.

7Original Tempo

Indicates the appropriate tempo value of the Arpeggio type. Note that this tempo is not set

automatically when selecting an Arpeggio type.

8Accent

The circle indicates that the Arpeggio uses the Accent Phrase feature (page 14).

9Random SFX

The circle indicates that the Arpeggio uses the SFX feature (page 14).

)Sound Type

Indicates the sound type appropriate for the Arpeggio Type.

*1 The Loop parameter is set as follows.

[EDIT]  Part Selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Arpeggio]  [Common] (page 73)

Arpeggio-related settings

There are several methods for triggering and stopping the Arpeggio playback. In addition, you can set

whether or not SFX sounds and special Accent Phrases are triggered along with the normal sequence

data.

The following three settings are available for turning the Arpeggio playback on/off.

NOTE “Hold” is set as follows.

[EDIT]  Part Selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Arpeggio]  [Common] (page 73)

NOTE When receiving a MIDI sustain message (control change #64) with both of “Arp Master” and “Arp Part” set to

“On,” you can obtain the same result by setting “Hold” to “On.”

NOTE “Trigger Mode” is set as follows.

[EDIT]  Part Selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Arpeggio]  [Advanced] (page 77)

Turning Arpeggio playback on/off

To play the Arpeggio only when the note is

pressed:

Set the “Hold” parameter to “Off” and the “Trigger

Mode” parameter to “Gate.”

To continue the Arpeggio even if the note is

released:

Set the “Hold” parameter to “On” and the “Trigger

Mode” parameter to “Gate.”

To toggle the Arpeggio playback on/off

whenever the note is pressed:

Set the “Trigger Mode” parameter to “Toggle.” The

“Hold” parameter can be set to either “On” or “Off.”

MONTAGE Reference Manual 14

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

By pressing the Knob function [ARP/MS] button, you can use the Knobs 1 – 4 to control Arpeggio

playback. Try this out and listen for the changes in the sound. For details regarding the effect of the Knobs

1 – 8, see Quick Edit (page 31).

Accent Phrases are composed of sequence data included in some Arpeggio types, sounding only when

you play notes at a velocity higher (stronger) than that specified in the Accent Velocity Threshold

parameter.

If it is hard to play at velocities necessary to trigger the Accent Phrase, set the “Vel Threshold” (Accent

Velocity Threshold) parameter to a lower value.

NOTE “Vel Threshold” (Accent Velocity Threshold) parameter is set as follows.

[EDIT]  Part Selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Arpeggio]  [Advanced] (page 77)

NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use this function, refer to the “Arpeggio Type List” in the Data List PDF

document.

Some Arpeggio types feature a Random SFX function which will trigger special sounds (such as guitar fret

noises) when the note is released. The following parameters affecting Random SFX are provided.

NOTE “Random SFX,” “Velocity Offset,” and “Key On Ctrl” are set as follows.

[EDIT]  Part Selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Arpeggio]  [Advanced] (page 77)

NOTE The Random SFX function is not available for the Arpeggio which stops when the note is released.

NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use the Random SFX function, refer to the “Arpeggio Type List” in the

Data List PDF document.

Using the Knobs to control Arpeggios

Accent Phrases

Random SFX

For turning the Random SFX on/off: Random SFX parameter

For setting the volume of the SFX sound: Velocity Offset (Random SFX Velocity Offset)

parameter

For determining whether or not the volume of

the SFX sound is controlled by velocity:

Key On Ctrl (Random SFX Key on Control) parameter

Arpeggio functions which can be controlled by Knob operations

Knob 1 Knob 2 Knob 3 Knob 4

MONTAGE Reference Manual 15

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

Arpeggio playback types

There are three main Arpeggio playback types as described below.

Arpeggio types (belonging to all categories except for Drum/Perc and a part of Control/HybridSeq)

created for use of Normal Parts have the following three playback types.

Playback of played notes only

The Arpeggio is played back using only the played note(s) and octave notes.

Playback of a programmed sequence according to the played notes

These Arpeggio types have the several sequences each of which is suited for a certain chord type. Even if

you press only one note, the Arpeggio is played back using the programmed sequence— meaning that

notes other than the ones you play may be sounded. Pressing another note triggers a transposed

sequence using the pressed note as the new root note. Adding notes to those already held changes the

sequence accordingly. Arpeggios with this playback type have “_N” at the end of the type name.

Playback of a programmed sequence according to the played chord

These Arpeggio types created for use with Normal Parts are played back to match the chord type

determined by detecting the notes you play on the keyboard. Arpeggios with this playback type have “_C”

at the end of the type name.

NOTE When the “Key Mode” parameter is set to “Sort” or “Sort+Drct,” the same sequence is played back no matter

what order you play the notes. When the “Key Mode” parameter is set to “Thru” or “Thru+Drct,” a different

sequence is played back depending on the order you play the notes.

NOTE Since these types are programmed for Normal Parts, using them with Drum Parts may not produce musically

appropriate results.

Arpeggio types in Drum/Perc categories are programmed specifically for use with Drum Parts, giving you

instant access to various rhythm patterns. Three different playback types are available.

Playback of a drum pattern

Pressing any note(s) will trigger the same rhythm pattern.

Playback of a drum pattern, plus additional played notes (assigned drum

instruments)

Pressing any note will trigger the same rhythm pattern. Adding notes to the one already held produces

additional sounds (assigned drum instruments) for the drum pattern.

Playback only of the played notes (assigned drum instruments)

Playing a note or notes will trigger a rhythm pattern using only the notes played (assigned drum

instruments). Keep in mind that even if you play the same notes, the triggered rhythm pattern differs

depending on the order of the notes played. This gives you access to different rhythm patterns using the

same instruments simply by changing the order in which you play the notes, when the “Key Mode”

parameter is set to “Thru” or “Thru+Drct.”

NOTE The three playback types above are not distinguished by category name or type name. You’ll have to actually

play the types and hear the difference.

NOTE Since these types are programmed for Drum Parts, using them with Normal Parts may not produce musically

appropriate results.

Arpeggios for Normal Parts

Arpeggios for Drum Parts

MONTAGE Reference Manual 16

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

Arpeggio types (in Control/HybridSeq main categories with Filter, Expression, Pan, Modulation, Pitch Bend,

and Assign 1/2 sub categories) are programmed primarily with Control Change and Pitch Bend data. They

are used to change the tone or pitch of the sound, rather than play specific notes.

In fact, some types contain no note data at all. When using a type of this category, set the “Key Mode”

parameter to “Direct,” “Sort+Drct,” or “Thru+Drct.”

NOTE Settings related to Key Mode are set as follows.

[EDIT]  Part Selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Arpeggio]  [Common] (page 73)

Motion Sequencer Block

The powerful Motion Sequencer feature lets you dynamically change sounds by operating Parameters

depending on sequences created in advance.

It provides real time control for changing sounds depending on various sequences such as Tempo,

Arpeggio, or the rhythm of external connected devices.

You can assign up to eight desired Sequence types for one Lane.

You can also set up to four Lanes corresponding to the Motion Sequencer function for one Part. Up to eight

Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire Performance.

The setting status (on or off) the Lanes in the entire Performance will be shown as follows.

[PERFORMANCE]  [Motion Control]  [Motion Seq] (page 38)

Also, the parameters for each Lane are set as follows.

[PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Motion Seq] 

[Lane] (page 81)

Arpeggios containing mainly non-note events

Tips for Arpeggio playback

Arpeggios not only provide inspiration and full rhythmic passages over which you can perform, they

give you quality MIDI data you can use in creating Songs, or fully formed backing parts to be used in

your live performances. For instructions on using Arpeggio, see the “Quick Guide” in the Owner’s

Manual.

Lane setting Sequence Patterns for the Lane

Selected Sequence setting Lane setting

MONTAGE Reference Manual 17

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

The following settings are available for turning the Motion Sequencer playback on/off.

NOTE “LaneSW” and “Trigger” are set as follows.

[EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [MOTION Seq]  [Lane] (page 81)

By pressing the Knob function [ARP/MS] button, you can use the Knobs 1 – 2 and 5 – 8 to control Motion

Sequencer playback. Try this out and listen for the changes in the sound. For details regarding the effect of

the Knobs, see Quick Edit (page 31).

You can create a custom Motion Sequence consisting of up to sixteen steps. For details about Editing, see

page 83.

In this instrument, Motion Sequencer is considered as a virtual controller and can be selectable in the

“Source” parameter. The target parameter you want to control by Motion Sequencer is set in the

“Destination” parameter. For details, see page 89.

Turning the Motion Sequencer on/off

To play the Motion Sequence when the note is

pressed:

Set the “LaneSW” parameter to “On,” the “Trigger”

parameter to “Off,” and the” Sync” parameter to “Off.”

To play the Motion Sequence when the

[MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button is pressed:

Set the “LaneSW” parameter to “On,” the “Trigger”

parameter to “On,” and the “Sync” parameter to “Off.”

Using the Knobs to control Motion Sequencer

Editing Motion Sequences

Parameters related to Motion Sequencer

Motion Sequencer functions which can be controlled by Knob operations

Knob 1 Knob 2 Knob 5 Knob 6 Knob 7 Knob 8

MONTAGE Reference Manual 18

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

Effect Block

This block applies effects to the output of the tone generator block as well as audio input block,

processing and enhancing the sound. Effects are applied in the final stages of editing, letting you change

the sound as desired.

Effect structure

System Effects are applied to the overall sound. With System Effects, the sound of each Part is sent to the

effect according to the Effect Send Level for each Part. The processed sound (referred to as “wet”) is sent

back to the mixer according to the Return Level, and output—after being mixed with the unprocessed

“dry” sound. This instrument is equipped with Variation and Reverb as System Effects. In addition, you can

set the Send Level from Variation to Reverb. This parameter is used to apply Reverb to the signals output

from the Variation. You can get a natural effect by applying Reverb depth to the Variation sound with the

same level as that of the dry sound.

Insertion Effects can be applied individually to each of specified parts before merging signals of all parts.

It should be used for sounds for which you want to drastically change the character. You can set different

Effect types to the Insertion Effects A and B for each Part. These settings can be set Part Edit  [Effect]

(page 67, page 122, page 136).

This synthesizer features 17 sets of Insertion Effects. They can be applied to 1 to 16 Parts (maximum) and

A/D Input Part.

This block applies effects to the final stereo output signal of the entire sound. Multiple Effect types are

available.

Element EQ is applied to each Element of the Normal Part (AWM2) and each key of the Drum Part. You can

specify one of three different EQ shapes, including shelving and peaking.

NOTE Element EQ does not affect the Input signals from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

This EQ is applied to a Part before and after the Insertion Effect.

Master EQ is applied to the final (post-effect), overall sound of the instrument. In this EQ, all five bands can

be set to peaking, with shelving being available also for the lowest and highest bands.

System Effects — Variation and Reverb

Insertion Effects

Master Effect

Element EQ

Part EQ

Master EQ

Part

3-band

parametric EQ

2-band

parametric EQ

Insertion Effect

Part EQ Part EQ

MONTAGE Reference Manual 19

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

Effect connection

1Each EQ and Insertion Effect applied to each

Part

2Variation and Reverb related parameters

Setting: Part Edit  [Effect]  [Routing] (page 67, page 122,

page 136)

Common/Audio Edit  [Effect]  [Routing] (page 154)

3Master Effect related parameters

Setting: Common/Audio Edit  [Effect]  [Master FX]

(page 158)

4Master EQ related parameters

Setting: Common/Audio Edit  [Effect]  [Master EQ]

(page 159)

NOTE Regarding the audio input signal from the A/D INPUT [L/

MONO]/[R] jacks, the effect is set in Common/Audio Edit

 [Audio In].

About the Vocoder Effect

MONTAGE features a Vocoder effect. Vocoder is a distinctive, “robot voice” effect which extracts the

characteristic of the microphone sound and adds it to the sound via your keyboard performance. The

human voice consists of sounds generated from the vocal cords, and filtered by the throat, nose and

mouth. These resonant sections have specific frequency characteristics and they function effectively as a

filter, creating many formants (harmonic content). The Vocoder effect extracts the filter characteristics of

the voice from the microphone input and recreates the vocal formants by the use of multiple band pass

filters. The machine-like ‘robot’ voice is created by passing the pitched sounds of musical instruments

(such as a synthesizer sound) through the filters.

About Effect categories, Effect types, and Effect parameters

For information regarding the effect categories of this instrument and the effect types contained in

their categories, see the “Effect Type List” in the Data List PDF document. For information on the

effect parameters which can be set in the each effect type, see the “Effect Parameter List” in the Data

List PDF document. For information on the descriptions of each effect category, each effect type, and

each effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameters Manual PDF document.

About Preset settings

Preset settings for parameters of each effect type are provided as templates and can be selected in

the Effect Type selection display. To get a desired effect sound, try first selecting one of the Presets

close to your imagined sound, then change the parameters as necessary. Preset settings can be

determined by setting “Preset” in each effect parameter display. For information on each effect type,

see the Data List PDF document.

Performance

Part Part EQ

Insertion A/B

Send Level

Variation

Reverb

Variation

to Reverb

System Effect

Return Level

Master

Effect

Master EQ

Mic Input or

Part Output

(Keyboard

Performance)

Extracting the characteristic

of the input sound

Creating formants

Vocoder

Robot-like

voice

MONTAGE Reference Manual 20

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

Envelope Follower Block

Envelope Follower is a function for detecting the envelope of the input signal waveform and modifying

sounds dynamically. This function allows you to control not only Part outputs but also input signals from

external devices connected to the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

The Input source of each Envelope Follower is fixed such as Part 1 for EnvFollower 1, Part 2 for

EnvFollower 2, and the Audio Part for EnvFollower AD. However, the signal output from each Envelope

Follower can be another “input source” for any desired destination such as each Part or even the entire

Performance. For example, you can modify the sound of Part 2 by using the Envelope Follower for Part 1

(EnvFollower 1) as the “Source.” The Envelope Follower as the “Source” and the target parameter to be

controlled by the Envelope Follower (which is called “Destination”) are set in the Control Assign display

(page 89).

[EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Audio In]  [Routing]  “Envelope Follower” (EnvFollower AD)

[EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Effect]  [Routing]  “Envelope Follower” (EnvFollower MST)

[EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Effect]  [Routing]  “Envelope

Follower” (EnvFollower 1 – 16)

EnvFollower 1 EnvFollower 2 EnvFollower MST EnvFollower AD

Input signal to Envelope Follower (Fixed)

Output signal from Envelope Follower (The Destination is flexible)

Each Envelope Follower

Part 1 Part 2 Entire

Performance

(sixteen Parts and

Audio Part)

Audio Part

Each Input source for Envelope Follower

Selected Envelope Follower

Signal flow of

Envelope Follower

Input sources for

Envelope Follower

MONTAGE Reference Manual 21

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

Controller Block

This block consists of the keyboard, Pitch Bend and Modulation Wheels, Ribbon Controller, Knobs, Sliders

and so on. The keyboard itself doesn’t generate sounds, but instead generates/transmits note on/off,

velocity and other information (MIDI messages) to the synthesizer’s tone generator block when you play

notes. The controllers also generate/transmit MIDI messages. The synthesizer’s tone generator block

produces sound according to the MIDI messages transmitted from the keyboard and controllers.

Keyboard

The keyboard transmits the note on/off messages to the Tone Generator Block (for sounding) and

Sequencer Block (for recording). You can change the note range of the keyboard in octaves by using the

OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons, transpose the notes by using the OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons while holding down the

[SHIFT] button, and set how the actual velocity is generated according to the strength with which you play

notes.

Pitch Bend wheel

Use the Pitch Bend wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from

you) or down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard.

Roll the wheel upward/downward to bend the pitch upward/downward.

This wheel is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch

when released. The Pitch Bend Range setting can be changed in Part

Edit  [Part Settings]  [Pitch] (page 60). Functions other than Pitch

Bend can be assigned to the Pitch Bend wheel in the Part Edit 

[Mod/Control]  [Control Assign] (page 89, page 139).

Modulation wheel

Even though the Modulation wheel is conventionally used to apply

vibrato to the sound, many of the preset Performances have other

functions and effects assigned to the wheel.

The more you move this wheel up, the greater the effect that is applied

to the sound. To avoid accidentally applying effects to the current

Performance, make sure the Modulation wheel is set to minimum

before you start playing. Various functions can be assigned to the

Modulation wheel in Part Edit  [Mod/Control]  [Control Assign]

(page 89, page 139).

Ribbon Controller

The Ribbon Controller is touch sensitive, and is controlled by running your finger laterally across the

surface. Various functions are assigned to each Part of the preset Performance. Various functions can be

assigned to the Ribbon Controller in the Control Assign display (page 89) of the Part Edit. You can also

determine whether the Ribbon Controller value returns to the center, or stays at the point where you

released your finger in the General display (page 146) of the Common/Audio Edit.

Assignable Switches

According to the XA (Expanded Articulation) Control settings (page 6) in Element Edit  [Osc/Tune]

(page 94), you can call up specific Elements of the current Part by pressing each of these buttons during

your keyboard performance. You can select how the on/off status of these buttons is switched in Common/

Audio Edit  [General] (page 145). Furthermore, you can assign various functions (other than calling up

specific Elements) to these buttons in Part Edit  [Mod/Control]  [Control Assign] (page 89, page 139).

Pitch up

Pitch down

Maximum

Minimum

MONTAGE Reference Manual 22

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

Knobs/Control Sliders

These knobs and sliders let you change various aspects of the Part’s sound in real time—while you play.

For instructions on using the knobs/sliders, see the Owner’s Manual. For instructions on using the Knobs 1

– 8, see “Quick Edit” (page 29).

Super Knob

The Super Knob lets you simultaneously control the parameters common to all Parts (Assign 1 – 8) which

are assigned to the eight knobs. For instructions on using the Super Knob, see the Owner’s Manual. For

the editable setting values for the Super Knob, see the Super Knob display (page 39). Also, for instructions

on setting the Assign 1 – 8 controls, see the Control Assign display (page 152) for the Common/Audio Edit.

Internal Memory

The MONTAGE creates a variety of different kinds of data, including Performances, Live Sets, and Songs.

This section describes how to maintain the various types of data and use the memory devices/media for

storing them.

Preset Memory

Preset Memory is memory designed specifically for reading out data such as Preset Performance,

Arpeggio, and Audition Phrase. You cannot overwrite the data in Preset Memory.

Internal Memory

Recall

Buffer

Excluding

Master and

Utility settings

Preset Memory

• Preset Performance

• Arpeggio

• Motion Sequence

• Audition Phrase

•Waveform

•Live Set

•Curve

• Micro Tuning

Edit Buffer

• Performance Edit

• Motion Sequence Edit

• User Curve Edit

• Live Set Edit

• User Micro Tuning Edit

•User Waveform Edit

• Utility

• Quick Setup

• Song

User Memory

For User

• User Performance

• User Arpeggio

• User Motion Sequence

•User Curve

•User Live Set

• User Micro Tuning

•User Waveform

•Utility

• Quick Setup

Store (executed by

using store button)

For Library

Song

Audio Record/Playback

Data communication

between this synthesizer

and an external device

Internal data communication

MIDI instrument or computer

DAW software

Bulk Dump

Load/Save

USB Flash Memory

MOTIF XF format

File extensions “.X3A,” “.X3V,”

“.X3G,” and “.X3W”

File extensions “.X7U”

File extensions “.X7L”

File extensions “.MID”

File extensions “.WAV”

File extensions “.WAV” “.AIF”

Compare

Buffer

Excluding

Master and

Utility settings

MONTAGE Reference Manual 23

Basic Structure

Functional blocks

Tone Generator block

A/D Input block

Sequencer block

Arpeggio block

Motion Sequencer block

Effect block

Envelope Follower block

Controller block

Internal Memory

Reference

Display (touch panel) config.

Performance Play (Home)

Motion Control

Mixing

Scene

Play/Rec

Normal Part (AWM) Edit

Drum Part Edit

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common/Audio Edit

Category Search

Utility

Live Set

iPhone/iPad connection

Edit buffer

The edit buffer is the memory location for edited data of these types: Performance, Live Set, and Song.

Although the edit buffer is designed specifically for data writing and data reading, the data contained in

the edit buffer is lost when the power is turned off. You should always store edited data to User memory

before editing new performance or before turning off the power. Data other than Performance and Motion

Sequence are automatically stored.

User memory

User data edited in the Edit buffer and utility settings for the entire system are stored in the dedicated area

in the User memory. Up to eight Library files (.X7L) read from the USB flash memory device are loaded in

the dedicated area in the User memory.

This is read-write memory and the data will be kept even after the power is turned off.

Recall buffer and Compare buffer

If you’ve selected another Performance without storing the one you were editing, you can recall your

original edits, since the edit buffer’s contents are stored on backup memory, called the Recall buffer. Also,

the instrument has a Compare buffer in which the sound settings prior to editing will temporarily be

reinstated for comparison purposes. You can switch between the just-edited sound and its unedited

condition, and hear how your edits affect the sound. Both of these are read-write memory types. However,

you should make sure to store the sequence data before turning off the power, because any sequence

data you’ve created will be lost when the power is turned off. For instructions on using the Compare

function, see the Owner’s Manual.

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Display (touch panel)

Reference

Display (touch panel) configuration

This section explains the navigation bar which is common to all types of displays.

1HOME icon

Moves to the Performance Play display (page 26).

2EXIT icon

Functions same as the [EXIT] button on the panel. Press this icon to exit from the current display and

return to the previous level in the hierarchy.

3[INFORMATION] area

Displays helpful information, including the currently selected display name.

4EFFECT icon

Touch the icon to call up the Effect Switch display (page 182). The icon turns off when any of the Effect

blocks (Insertion, System or Master) is off.

5QUICK SETUP icon

Displays the settings of Local Control ON/OFF and MIDI IN/OUT.

The keyboard-shaped icon lights up when Local Control is set to ON and turns off when Local Control

is set to OFF.

When MIDI is set as the MIDI IN/OUT setting, a MIDI connector-shaped icon appears. When USB is set

as the MIDI IN/OUT setting, a USB connector-shaped icon appears. Touch the desired icon to call up

the corresponding Quick Setup display (page 166).

6TEMPO SETTINGS icon

Displays the tempo of the currently selected Performance. Touch the icon to call up the Tempo Settings

display (page 180).

7LIVE SET icon

Touch the icon to call up the Live Set display (page 183).

8UTILITY icon

Touch the icon to call up the last opened display among the Utility displays.

12 4 76835

Navigation bar

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Display (touch panel)

Reference

9Pop-up List

Displays setting values for parameters. When the setting values are displayed in multiple pages, you

will need to use the Scroll buttons to scroll through the pages or the Display All button to display all of

the setting values.

Scroll buttons Display All

Display All button

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Performance Play (Home)

From the Performance Play display you can play a selected Performance and edit some of the

Performance-related settings.

1Performance name

Indicates the currently selected Performance name. Touching the parameter calls up the menu for

Category Search, Edit, and Recall.

NOTE Once you edit any parameter in the selected Performance, a blue flag icon appears at right in the

Performance Name.

2Part indicator

When the cursor is on the Performance name or on Parts 1 – 8, this indicates whether Parts 9 – 16 are

used or not.

When the cursor is on Parts 9 – 16, it indicates whether Parts 1 – 8 are used or not. If Parts 9 – 16 are

not in use, this indicator is not shown.

3Flag

Indicates the tone generation attributes of the currently selected Performance. (See chart below.)

4Knob functions

Indicates the functions currently assigned to the Knobs 1 – 8.

Home

Operation Press the [PERFORMANCE] button, or

Touch the [HOME] icon

Flag Definition

AWM2 Performance comprised only of AWM2 Parts

FM-X Performance comprised only of FM-X Parts

FM-X+AWM2 Performance comprised of both AWM2 and FM-X Parts

MC Performance featuring Motion Control

SSS Performance featuring Seamless Sound Switching

)

@# $

7 8

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

5Part names

Indicates the Part names. Touching the parameter calls up the menu for Category Search, Edit, and

Copy. To add another Part, touch “+” icon.

6Common Motion Sequencer switch

Determines whether the Motion Sequencer of the Common/AD Parts is on or off. When all Lane

switches of the Common/AD Parts are off, this switch is not shown.

Settings: Off, On

7Part Arpeggio On/Off switch

Determines whether the Arpeggio of each Part is on or off.

Settings: Off, On

8Part Motion Sequencer switch

Determines whether the Motion Sequencer of each Part is on or off. When all Lane switches of the Part

are off, this switch is not shown.

Settings: Off, On

9Note Limit

Determines the lowest and highest notes in the Part’s note range. For example, setting a Note Limit of

“C5 – C4” lets you hear the Part by playing notes in the two ranges of C -2 to C4 and C5 to G8; notes

played between C4 and C5 have no sound. For details about the Note Limit setting, see the Owner’s

Manual.

Settings: C -2 – G8

)Keyboard Control switch

Determines whether the Keyboard Control for each Part is on or off. When this switch is set to off, the

Part will not sound even you play the keyboard (unless the Part is selected).

Settings: Off, On

!Switching Mute on/off for Parts

Determines whether the Mute for each Part is on or off.

Settings: Off, On

@Switching Solo on/off for Parts

Determines whether the Solo for each Part is on or off.

Settings: Off, On

#Volume of Parts

Determines the Volume for the Part.

Settings: 0 – 127

$Meter

Indicates the audio output level of the Part.

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Motion Control

From the Motion Control display you can edit all Motion Control settings, such as general sound settings,

Arpeggio, and the Motion Sequencer of the currently selected Performance.

The Motion Control section contains the following various displays.

• Overview

•Quick Edit

•Arpeggio

• Motion Sequencer

• Super Knob

•Knob Auto

The Overview display indicates the illustration of the connection between Controllers and Parts. You can

confirm the current settings here.

Part

Indicates the currently selected Part. To confirm a Part’s connections, select the Part here.

Settings: Common, Part 1 – 16

Edit Common Control Settings/Edit Part Control Settings

Calls up the Control Assign display for the selected Part. For “Common,” see page 152. For Part 1 – 16,

see page 89.

Control Function (Controller Function)

Switches between the Performance Control and the Part Control.

Settings: Performance Control, Part Control

Motion Control

Overview

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [Motion Control]  [Overview] or [SHIFT] + [PERFORMANCE]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Controller

Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Controller” and Part is shown.

The “Controller” here refers to:

• Pitch Bend wheel

• Modulation wheel

• Ribbon Controller

• [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons (Assignable switches 1 and 2)

• [MOTION SEQ HOLD] (Motion sequencer Hold) button

• [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] (Motion sequencer trigger) button

Settings: Off, On

Assignable

Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Assignable” and Part is shown.

The “Assignable” here refers to:

• Assignable Knobs 1 – 8

Settings: Off, On

Fader

Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Fader” and Part is shown.

The “Fader” here refers to:

• Control sliders 1 – 8

Settings: Off, On

Super Knob

Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Super Knob” and Part is shown.

The “Super Knob” here refers to:

• Super Knob

Settings: Off, On

From the Quick Edit display you can make general sound settings. You can select whether the settings are

commonly applied to all Parts or to only one selected Part.

The parameters with the indicators can be controlled by the Knobs 1 – 8. To do this, use the Knob Function

[TONE]/[EQ/FX]/[ARP/MS] buttons for switching the knob operations.

Quick Edit

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [Motion Control]  [Quick Edit]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Part

Indicates the currently selected Part. Select the Part you want to use Quick Edit with here.

Settings: Common, Part 1 – 16

When “Part” is set to “Common”

You can edit the parameters commonly applied to all Parts.

Performance Name

Enters the desired name for the Performance. Performance names can contain up to 20 characters.

Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.

FEG Atk (FEG Attack Time)

Determines the speed of filter variation from the time a note is played until the maximum initial level of

the Cutoff Frequency is reached. This parameter determines the offset value of the FEG (page 105) for

the Element/Operator Common.

Settings: -64 – +63

FEG Decay (FEG Decay Time)

Determines how fast the Cutoff Frequency falls from maximum attack level to the sustain level. This

parameter determines the offset value of the FEG parameter (page 105) for the Element/Operator

Common.

Settings: -64 – +63

FEG Rel (FEG Release Time)

Determines how fast the Cutoff Frequency falls from the sustain level to zero when a note is released.

This parameter determines the offset value for the FEG parameter (page 105) of the Element/Operator

Common.

Settings: -64 – +63

Edit Master EQ

Calls up the Master EQ display (page 159) for Common/Audio Edit.

Edit All Arp (Edit All Arpeggio)

Calls up the Arpeggio display (page 35) for Motion Control.

Edit Common MS (Edit Common Motion Sequencer)

Calls up the Motion Sequencer Lane display (page 151) for Common/Audio Edit.

Cutoff (Cutoff Frequency)

Determines the Cutoff Frequency for the Filter, when the Low Pass Filter is selected, for example, the

larger the value the brighter the decay. This parameter determines the offset value of the Filter Cutoff

Frequency (page 102) for the Element/Drum Key/Operator Common.

Settings: -64 – +63

Resonance

Determines the emphasis given to the Cutoff Frequency. This parameter determines the offset value of

the Filter Resonance (page 103) for the Element/Drum Key/Operator Common.

Settings: -64 – +63

FEG Depth

Determines the range over which the cutoff frequency of the Filter EG changes. This parameter

determines the offset value of the FEG Depth (page 105) for the Element/Operator Common.

Settings: -64 – +63

Portamento (Portamento Time)

Determines the pitch transition time when Portamento is applied. This parameter is synchronized to the

same parameter for the Common/Audio Edit.

Settings: -64 – +63

Attack (AEG Attack Time)

Determines the speed of attack from the time a key is played until the maximum initial level of the AEG

is reached. This parameter determines the offset value of the AEG (page 110, page 129, page 143) for

the Element/Drum Key/Operator.

Settings: -64 – +63

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Decay (AEG Decay Time)

Determines how fast the volume falls from maximum attack level to the sustain level. This parameter

determines the offset value of the AEG (page 110, page 129, page 143). for the Element/Drum Key/

Operator

Settings: -64 – +63

Sustain (AEG Sustain Level)

Determines the sustain level at which the volume will continue while a note is held, after the initial attack

and decay. This parameter determines the offset value of the AEG (page 110, page 129, page 143) for

the Element/Drum Key/Operator.

Settings: -64 – +63

Release (AEG Release Time)

Determines how fast the volume falls from the sustain level to zero when a note is released. This

parameter determines the offset value of the AEG (page 110, page 129, page 143) for the Element/

Drum Key/Operator.

Settings: -64 – +63

Low Gain (Maser EQ Low Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low band.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

Lo Mid Gain (Master EQ Low Mid Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low Mid band.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

Mid Gain (Master EQ Mid Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Mid band.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

Hi Mid Gain (Master EQ High Mid Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High Mid band.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

High Gain (Master EQ High Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High band.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

Pan (Performance Pan)

Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Performance. This parameter offsets the same

parameter in the Part Edit setting.

Settings: L63 – C (center) – R63

Var Return (Variation Return)

Determines the Return level of the Variation Effect.

Settings: 0 – 127

Rev Return (Reverb Return)

Determines the Return level of the Reverb Effect.

Settings: 0 – 127

Common Clock Swing (Common Swing)

Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This is the offset

value for the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for each Part.

Settings: -120 – +120

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Common Clock Unit (Common Unit Multiply)

Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the entire Performance.

This parameter is applied to the Part when the Unit Multiply parameter for Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer

of the Part is set to “Common.”

By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer type from the original

one.

Settings: 50% – 400%

200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.

100%: The normal playback time.

50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.

Common Arp Gate Time (Common Arpeggio Gate Time)

Determines the Gate Time Rate (length) of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset

value for the Gate Time Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.

Settings: -100 – +100

Common Arp Velocity (Common Arpeggio Velocity Rate)

Determines the Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the

Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.

Settings: -100 – +100

Common Motion Seq Amplitude (Common Motion Sequencer Amplitude)

Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Amplitude” determines

how the entire Motion Sequence changes.

This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Amplitude, which is also the offset value for the Lane

Amplitude. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Amplitudes offset the Amplitude setting

in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).

Settings: -64 – +63

Common Motion Seq Shape (Common Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)

Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This changes the

step curve shape of the sequence.

This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Pulse Shape, which is also the offset value for the Lane

Pulse Shape. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Pulse Shapes offset the Pulse Shape

setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to

on for the parameter).

Settings: -100 – +100

Common Motion Seq Smooth (Common Motion Sequencer Smoothness)

Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Smoothness” is the

degree to which the time of the Motion Sequence is smoothly changed.

This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Smoothness, which is also the offset value for the Lane

Smoothness. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Smoothnesses offset the

Smoothness setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).

Settings: -64 – +63

Common Motion Seq Random (Common Motion Sequencer Random)

Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Random” is the degree

to which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.

This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Random when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane.

Settings: -64 – +63

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

When “Part” is set to Part 1 – 16

You can edit the parameters for the selected Part.

Part Category Main (Part Main Category)

Part Category Sub (Part Sub Category)

Determines the Main Category and Sub Category of the Part.

The categories are keywords representing the general characteristics of the Parts. Selecting the

appropriate category makes it easy to find the desired Part from the huge variety of Parts available.

There are 17 Main Categories which indicate types of instruments. There are up to nine Sub Categories

for each Main Category, indicating more detailed types of instruments.

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Part Name

Enters the desired name for the Part. Part names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the

parameter calls up the input character display.

The parameters below are same as the ones when “Part” is set to “Common” (page 30).

• FEG Atk (FEG Attack Time)

• FEG Decay (FEG Decay Time)

• FEG Rel (FEG Release Time)

•Cutoff

• Resonance

• FEG Depth

• Portamento (Portamento Time)

The setting values differ from the ones which “Part” is set to “Common.”

Settings: 0 – 127

• Attack (AEG Attack Time)

• Decay (AEG Decay Time)

• Sustain (AEG Sustain Level)

• Release (AEG Release Time)

FEG Sus (FEG Sustain Level)

Determines the FEG Sustain Level for the Part. This is the offset value for the FEG Decay2 Level of the

Element/Operator Common (page 105).

Settings: -64 – +63

Edit Part EQ

Calls up the Part EQ display (page 70) for Part Edit.

Edit Part Arp (Edit Part Arpeggio)

Calls up the Arpeggio display (page 73) for Part Edit.

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Edit Part MS (Edit Part Motion Sequencer)

Calls up the Motion Sequencer Lane display (page 81) for Part Edit.

EQ Low Gain (3 band EQ Low Gain)

Determines the level gain for the Low band.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

EQ Mid Freq (3 band EQ Mid Frequency)

Determines the frequency for the Mid band.

Settings: 139.7Hz – 10.1kHz

EQ Mid Gain (3 band EQ Mid Gain)

Determines the level gain for the Mid band.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

EQ Mid Q (3 band EQ Mid Q)

Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Mid band.

Settings: 0.7 – 10.3

EQ High Gain (3 band EQ Hi Gain)

Determines the level gain of the High band.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

Pan

Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part.

Settings: L63 – C (Center) – R63

Var Send (Variation Send)

Determines the Send level of the signal sent to the Variation effect.

Settings: 0 – 127

Rev Send (Reverb Send)

Determines the Send level of the signal sent to the Reverb effect.

Settings: 0 – 127

Part Clock Swing (Part Swing)

Delays notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel.

• +1 and higher: Delay the Arpeggio notes.

• -1 and lower: Advance the Arpeggio notes.

• 0: Exact timing as set by “Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid” Value, resulting in no swing.

Judicious use of this setting lets you create swing rhythms and triplet feels, such as shuffle and

bounce.

Settings: -120 – +120

Part Clock Unit (Part Unit Multiply)

Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the selected Part.

Settings: 50% – 400%, Common

200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.

100%: The normal playback time.

50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.

Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.

Part Arp Gate Time (Part Arpeggio Gate Time)

Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value.

This is the offset value for the Gate Time Rate (page 76) of each Arpeggio Select setting.

Settings: 0% – 200%

Part Arp Velocity (Part Arpeggio Velocity Rate)

Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value.

This is the offset value for the Velocity Rate (page 76) of each Arpeggio Select setting.

Settings: 0% – 200%

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Part Motion Seq Amplitude (Part Motion Sequencer Amplitude)

Determines the Amplitude (page 83) of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.

This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Amplitude when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane.

Settings: -64 – +63

Part Motion Seq Shape (Part Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)

Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.

This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq “Step Curve Parameter” (page 84) when “MS FX” is set

to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on for the parameter.

Settings: -100 – +100

Part Motion Seq Smooth (Part Motion Sequencer Smoothness)

Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.

This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Smoothness (page 83) when “MS FX” is set to on for the

Lane.

Settings: -64 – +63

Part Motion Seq Random

Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. “Random” is the degree to

which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.

Settings: 0 – 127

From the Arpeggio display you can set Arpeggio-related parameters for multiple Parts.

Touching the Arpeggio Type name on this display (or pressing the [CATEGORY] button on the panel) calls

up a menu. In the displayed menu, touch [Search] to call up the Arpeggio Category Search display and

touch [Number] to determine the Arpeggio Type by specifying the Arpeggio Number.

Part 9-16 / Part 1-8

Switches between the displays of Parts 9 – 16 or the Parts 1 – 8. In case of the picture above, touch the

“Part 9-16” to display the Arpeggio Types for the “Part 9-16.”

Settings: Part 9-16 / Part 1-8

Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch)

Determines whether the Arpeggio is on or off for the entire Performance. This setting is applied to the [ARP

ON/OFF] button on the panel.

Settings: Off, On

Arpeggio

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [Motion Control]  [Arpeggio]

Arpeggio Type

View

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value)

Determines the actual timing at which the next Arpeggio playback starts when you trigger it while the

Arpeggio of multiple Parts is playing back. When set to “off,” the next Arpeggio starts as soon as you

trigger it. The number indicates the clock.

Settings: Off, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),

480 (1/4 note)

Arp (Part Arpeggio Switch)

Determines whether the Arpeggio for each Part is on or off. This setting is applied to the Number C [1] – [8]

buttons on the panel in the Part Control status.

Settings: Off, On

Arp Select (Arpeggio Select)

Determines the Arpeggio Types. This setting is applied to the Number C [1] – [8] buttons on the panel in

the Performance Control status.

Settings: 1 – 8

View

Determines which information regarding Arpeggio Type is displayed.

Settings: Category, Number, Range

When “View” is set to “Category”

Category (Arpeggio Category)

Settings: See the Arpeggio category list (page 11).

Sub (Arpeggio Sub Category)

Settings: See the Arpeggio sub category list (page 11).

Name (Arpeggio Name)

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

When “View” is set to “Number”

Bank (Arpeggio Bank)

Settings: Preset, User, Library 1 – 8

Number (Arpeggio Number)

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Name (Arpeggio Name)

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

When “View” is set to “Range”

Name (Arpeggio Name)

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Velocity Limit (Arpeggio Velocity Limit)

Determines the lowest and highest velocity which can trigger Arpeggio playback. For details on

settings of Velocity Limit, see the Owner’s Manual.

Settings: 1 – 127

Note Limit (Arpeggio Note Limit)

Determines the lowest and highest notes in the Arpeggio’s note range. For details on settings of Note

Limit, see the Owner’s Manual.

Settings: C -2 – G8

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

From the Motion Sequencer display you can set parameters related to Motion Sequencer for multiple Parts.

MS Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch)

Determines whether the Motion Sequencer is on or off for the entire Performance. This setting is applied to

the [MOTION SEQ ON/OFF] button on the panel.

Settings: Off, On

Active (Active Motion Sequencer)

Indicates the number of the active Lane. The number after slash indicates the maximum number of the

Lanes which can be activated simultaneously.

PartSW (Motion Sequencer Part Switch)

Determines whether the Motion Sequencer is on or off for each Part/all Parts. This setting is applied to the

corresponding Number B [1] – [8] button on the panel in the Part Control status. Also you can turn the

Motion Sequencer for Common/AD Part on or off by operating the ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]

button on the panel. Please note that you cannot use the panel buttons when all Lane switches for the Part

are set to off.

Settings: Off, On

Lane Switch

Determines whether each Lane is on or off. You can set up to four Lanes corresponding to the Motion

Sequencer function for one Part. Up to eight Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire

Performance.

Settings: Off, On

Motion Seq Select (Motion Sequence Select)

Determines the Motion Sequence Type. This setting is applied to the Number B [1] – [8] buttons on the

panel in the Performance Control status.

Settings: 1 – 8

Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer)

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [Motion Control]  [Motion Seq]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

From the Super Knob display you can set parameters controlled by the Super knob.

Assignable Knob 1 – 8 Destination Value 1

Assignable Knob 1 – 8 Destination Value 2

Determines the lowest value (Assignable value 1) and the highest value (Assignable value 2) for the

corresponding Knob.

When you operate the Super Knob, the Assignable Knob value varies within the specified range.

Settings: 0 – 127

Assignable Knob 1 – 8 Value

Determines the value for the Assignable Knobs 1 – 8.

Settings: 0 – 127

Super Knob (Super Knob Value)

Determines the value of the Super Knob.

Settings: 0 – 127

LED Pattern (Super Knob LED Pattern)

Determines the lighting pattern of the Super Knob.

Settings: Type 1, Type 2-1, Type 2-2, Type 3-1, Type 3-2, Type 4-1, Type 4-2, Type 5-1, Type 5-2, Type 6, Type 7-1, Type 7-2,

Type 8-1, Type 8-2, Type 9, Type 10, Type 11, Off

Super Knob

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [Motion Control]  [Super Knob]

Assignable Knob 1 – 8 Destination Value 1

Assignable Knob 1 – 8 Destination Value 2

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

From the Knob Auto display you can set parameters related to Motion Sequencer applied to the Super

Knob (Super Knob Motion Sequencer.) The parameter value of the Super Knob can be automatically

controlled by the Motion Sequencer.

You can set only one Lane for the Super Knob Motion Sequencer.

NOTE Up to eight Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire Performance. However, the Lane set for the Super

Knob is not included in the eight referred to here.

MS Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch)

Turns the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance on/off. This setting is applied to the [MOTION SEQ

ON/OFF] button on the panel.

Settings: Off, On

Super Knob MS (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Switch)

Turns the Motion Sequencer applied to the Super Knob on/off.

Settings: Off, On

MS FX (Super Knob Motion Sequencer FX Receive)

Determines whether or not the Motion Sequencer is affected by the knob operation when the

corresponding Knob Function [ARP/MS FX] button is set to on.

Settings: Off, On

Trigger (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Trigger Receive)

Determines whether the signal from the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button is received or not. When this is

set to on, the Motion Sequence will begin whenever you press the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button.

Settings: Off, On

Sequence Select (Super Knob Motion Sequence Select)

Determines the Motion Sequence Type. This setting is applied to the Number B [1] – [8] buttons on the

panel in the Performance Control status.

Settings: 1 – 8

Sync Part (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync Part)

Determines which Part is synchronized with the Super Knob Motion Sequencer. This setting is applied to

the Note On Setting and the Arp/Motion Seq Grid setting for the selected Part.

Settings: Part 1 – Part 16

Knob Auto

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [Motion Control]  [Knob Auto]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid)

Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is

displayed in clocks.

For the Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length. This setting is applied to the Part which

is selected as the Sync Part (above).

Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),

480 (1/4 note)

Random (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Random)

Determines the degree to which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.

Settings: 0 – 127

Sync (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync)

Determines if the playback of the Motion Sequence applied to the Super Knob is synchronized to the

Tempo, Beat, or Arpeggio of the Performance.

Settings: Off, Tempo, Beat, Arp

Off: Super Knob Motion Sequencer plays back according to its own clock and is not synchronized to an external

clock.

Tempo: Super Knob Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the Performance tempo.

Beat: Super Knob Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the beat.

Arp: Super Knob Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the 1st beat of the measure of the currently playing

Arpeggio.

Speed (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Speed)

Determines the speed of the playback of the Motion Sequence.

This parameter is active when the Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync is “Off.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Unit Multiply (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Unit Multiply)

Adjusts the Super Knob Motion Sequencer playback time.

This parameter is active when the Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync is “Off.”

Settings: 50% – 6400%, Common

200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.

100%: The normal playback time.

50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.

Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.

Key On Reset (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Key On Reset)

Determines whether or not the playback of the Motion Sequence is stopped when you play the keyboard.

This parameter is active when the Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync is set to something other than

“Arp.”

Also this parameter is not available when “Trigger” is set to “On.”

Settings: Off, Each-On, 1st-On

Each-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequence from the beginning.

1st-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequencer from the beginning. If you play a

second note while the first is being held, the Sequence continues cycling according to the same phase as triggered

by the first note—in other words, the Sequence only resets if the first note is released before the second is played.

Loop (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Loop)

Determines whether the Motion Sequence is played only once or repeatedly.

Settings: Off, On

Velocity Limit (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Velocity Limit)

Determines the minimum and maximum Velocity values over which the Motion Sequence responds.

Settings: 1 – 127

Cycle (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Cycle)

Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence.

Settings: 1 – 16

Load Sequence

Loads Motion Sequence data in the User Memory. For details about Loading, see “Load” (page 174).

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Edit Sequence

Calls up the Motion Sequence Setting display. You can create a custom Sequence consisting of up to

sixteen steps.

Cycle (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Cycle)

Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence.

Settings: 1 – 16

Amplitude (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Amplitude)

Determines how the entire Motion Sequence changes.

Settings: 0 – 127

Smooth (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Smoothness)

Determines the smoothness of the time change of the Motion Sequence.

Settings: 0 – 127

Sequence Select (Super Knob Motion Sequence Select)

Determines the Motion Sequence Type. This setting is applied to the Number B [1] – [8] buttons on the

panel in the Performance Control status.

Settings: 1 – 8

Polarity (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Polarity)

Determines the Sequence Polarity.

Settings: Unipolar, Bipolar

Unipolar: Unipolar changes only in a positive direction from a base parameter value according to the Sequence.

Bipolar: Bipolar changes in both of positive and negative directions from a base parameter value.

Motion Seq Step Value (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Value)

Determines the Step Value for the Motion Sequence. You can control the Step Value 1 – 8 or 9 – 16 by the

Sliders 1 – 8 depending on the cursor position on the display.

Settings: 0 – 127

Motion Seq Step Type (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Type)

Determines each Step Type of the Motion Sequence. You can switch between the Step Types A and B for

the Step 1 – 8 or 9 – 16 by the SCENE [1] – [8] buttons depending on the cursor position on the display.

Settings: A, B

Motion Seq Step Value

Motion Seq Step Type

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Pulse A / Pulse B (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Type)

Determines the Curve Type of the parameter for each of “Pulse A” and “Pulse B.” “Motion Seq Step Type”

described above determines which curve set here is used for each step. The vertical axis indicates the

step value and the horizontal axis indicates the time. For detail about the curve shapes, see page 90.

Settings: For Preset Bank: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle,

Square, Trapezoid, Tilt Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold

For User Bank: User 1 – 32

When a Library file is read: Curves in Library 1 – 8

Direction (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Direction)

Determines the Direction of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence.

Settings: Forward, Reverse

Prm1 / Prm2 (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Parameter)

Adjusts the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence.

This parameter is not available depending on the Curve Type. Also the range of available parameter

values differs depending on the Curve Type.

Control (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Shape Control Switch)

Determines whether or not to control the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence by operating

Knobs. This parameter is displayed only when “MS FX” is set to on. Also this parameter is not available

depending on the Curve Type.

Settings: Off, On

Store Sequence

Stores the edited Motion Sequence data. For details about storing data, see “Store/Save” (page 176).

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Mixing

From the Mixing display you can adjust the volume and effect settings for each Part.

NOTICE

The settings in the Mixing display are stored as part of Performance data.

Part 1-16 / Audio Switch

Switches between the displays of the Mixing settings for Parts 1 – 16 or the Mixing settings for Parts 1 – 8,

the Audio Part, the Digital Part, and the Master.

Settings: Part 1-16, Audio

Mixing

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [Mixing]

Part 1-16 / Audio Switch

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

When one of Parts 1 – 16 is selected

Determines the Mixing setting for each Part 1 –16.

Part Category

Indicates the Main category for the Part.

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Function Switch

Determines the Mute/Solo setting and the Keyboard Control settings for the selected Part 1 – 16.

Settings: Mute/Solo, Kbd Ctrl

• When “Mute/Solo” is selected

Mute/Solo (Part Mute/Solo)

Turns the Mute/Solo function on/off for the selected Part 1 – 16. When the function is on, this button

lights.

Settings: Off, On

Function Switch Part Category

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

• When “Kbd Ctrl” is selected

Kbd Ctrl (Keyboard Control)

Turns the Keyboard Control function on/off for the selected Part 1 – 8. When the function is on, this

button lights.

Settings: Off, On

3-band/2-band Switch (3-band EQ/2-band EQ Switch)

Switches between the displays of the 3-band EQ or the 2-band EQ for Parts 1 – 16.

Settings: 3-band, 2-band

EQ (Equalizer)

Displays the 3-band EQ or the 2-band EQ depending on the “3-band/2-band” setting.

Touching the button calls up the menu of Part EQ Edit.

Rev Send (Reverb Send)

Adjusts the Reverb send level of the selected Part 1 – 16.

Settings: 0 – 127

3-band/2-band Switch EQ

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Var Send (Variation Send)

Adjusts the Variation send level of the selected Part 1 – 16.

Settings: 0 – 127

Dry Level

Determines the level of the unprocessed (dry) sound of the selected Part 1 – 16.

Settings: 0 – 127

Pan

Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part 1 – 16.

Settings: L63 – C – R63

Volume (Part Volume)

Determines the output level of the selected Part 1 – 16.

Settings: 0 – 127

When “AD” Audio Part or “Digi” Digital Part is selected

Determines the Mixing setting of the Audio/Digital Part.

A/D Part EQ (Audio Part Equalizer)

Displays the 2-band parametric EQ.

Touching the button calls up the menu of Common/Audio Part EQ Edit.

A/D Part Rev Send (Audio Part Reverb Send)

Digital Part Rev Send (Digital Part Reverb Send)

Adjusts the Reverb send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part.

Settings: 0 – 127

A/D Part Var Send (Audio Part Variation Send)

Digital Part Var Send (Digital Part Variation Send)

Adjusts the Variation send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part.

Settings: 0 – 127

A/D Part Dry Level (Audio Part Dry Level)

Digital Part Dry Level

Determines the level of the unprocessed (dry) sound of the Audio Part/Digital Part.

Settings: 0 – 127

A/D Part EQ

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

A/D Part Pan (Audio Part Pan)

Digital Part Pan

Determines the stereo pan position of the Audio Part/Digital Part.

Settings: L63 – C – R63

A/D Volume (Audio Part Volume)

Digital Part Volume

Determines the output level of the Audio Part/Digital Part.

Settings: 0 – 127

When “Mst” (Master Part) is selected

Determines the Master Mixing settings.

Master EQ (Master Equalizer)

Displays the 5-band parametric EQ.

Touching the button calls up the menu of Master EQ Edit.

Rev Return (Reverb Return)

Var Return (Variation Return)

Determines the return level of the Reverb/Variation effect.

Settings: 0 – 127

Pan (Performance Pan)

Determines the stereo pan position of the entire Performance. This parameter offsets the same

parameter in the Part Edit setting.

Settings: L63 – C – R63

Performance Volume

Determines the output level of the entire Performance.

Settings: 0 – 127

Master EQ

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Scene

You can store all parameter settings such as Arpeggio type, Motion Sequencer type, and the Part

parameter values together as a “Scene.” There are eight Scenes and you can select them by pressing the

[SCENE] button. From the Scene display you can edit parameters related to the Scene function.

When [Memory] is turned on for the function, the Motion Sequencer type, or the Arpeggio type, the

corresponding function information is automatically memorized to the currently selected [SCENE] button.

For details about the Scene function, see the Owner’s Manual.

NOTE You can also change Scene Settings from any other operation displays. To do this, set the parameter value

available for the Scene by operating the corresponding knob/slider, and press one of the SCENE [1] – [8]

buttons while holding down the [SHIFT] button. Scenes 1 to 8 are assigned to each button.

Scene Select

Switches Scenes by selecting tabs. This setting is applied to the SCENE [1] – [8] buttons on the panel.

Settings: 1 – 8

Memory (Memorize Switch)

Determines whether or not to memorize each parameter (such as Arpeggio, Motion Sequencer, Super

Knob, Mixing, Amplitude EG, and Arp/MS FX) as a Scene. When this is off, the parameter is not displayed

even when the corresponding tab is selected.

Settings: Off, On

When the “Arp/Motion Seq” tab is selected and both Memorize Switches for “Arp” and

“Motion Seq” are set to ON

Motion Seq Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch)

Determines whether Motion Sequencer is set to ON or OFF for the entire Performance in the selected

Scene.

Settings: Off, On

Motion Seq Select (Motion Sequence Select)

Determines the Motion Sequence type for the selected Scene.

Settings: 1 – 8

Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch)

Determines whether Arpeggio is set to ON or OFF for the entire Performance in the selected Scene.

Settings: Off, On

Scene

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [Scene]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Arp Select (Arpeggio Select)

Determines the Arpeggio type for the selected Scene.

Settings: 1 – 8

When the “Super Knob” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set

to ON

Super Knob (Super Knob Value)

Determines the Super Knob Value for the selected Scene.

Settings: 0 – 127

When the “Mixing 1” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set to

Rev Send (Reverb Send)

Adjusts the Reverb Send level of each Part in the selected Scene.

Settings: 0 – 127

Var Send (Variation Send)

Adjusts the Variation Send level of each Part in the selected Scene.

Settings: 0 – 127

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Dry Level

Determines the level of the unprocessed (dry) sound for each Part in the selected Scene.

Settings: 0 – 127

Pan

Determines the stereo pan position for each Part in the selected Scene.

Settings: L63 – C – R63

Volume (Part Volume)

Determines the volumes of each Part in the selected Scene.

Settings: 0 – 127

When the “Mixing 2” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set to

Cutoff

Determines the Cutoff frequency for each Part in the selected Scene.

Settings: -64 – +63

Res (Resonance)

Determines the resonance for each Part in the selected Scene.

Settings: -64 – +63

FEG Depth

Determines the Filter Envelope Generator depth (amount of Cutoff Frequency) for each Part in the

selected Scene.

Settings: -64 – +63

Mute (Part Mute)

Determines the Mute setting for each Part in the selected Scene.

Settings: Off, On

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

When the “AEG” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set to ON

Attack (AEG Attack Time)

Determines the AEG Attack Time for each Part in the selected Scene.

Settings: -64 – +63

Decay (AEG Decay Time)

Determines the AEG Decay Time for each Part in the selected Scene.

Settings: -64 – +63

Sustain (AEG Sustain Level)

Determines the AEG Sustain Level for each Part in the selected Scene.

Settings: -64 – +63

Release (AEG Release Time)

Determines the AEG Release Time for each Part in the selected Scene.

Settings: -64 – +63

When the “Arp/MS FX 1” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set

to ON

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Swing

Determines the Swing setting of Arpeggio and Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene.

For details about Swing, see “Quick Edit” (page 34).

Settings: -120 – +120

Unit (Part Unit Multiply)

Determines the Unit Multiply setting of Arpeggio and Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected

Scene.

Settings: 50% – 400%, Common

200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.

100%: The normal playback time.

50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.

Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.

Gate Time (Gate Time Rate)

Determines the Gate Time Rate of Arpeggio for each Part in the selected Scene.

Settings: 0% – 200%

Velocity (Velocity Rate)

Determines the Velocity Rate of Arpeggio for each Part in the selected Scene.

Settings: 0% – 200%

When the “Arp/MS FX 2” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set

to ON

Amp (Motion Sequencer Amplitude)

Determines the Amplitude of Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene. For details about

Amplitude, see “Quick Edit” (page 32).

Settings: -64 – +63

Shape (Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)

Determines the Pulse Shape of Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene. For details

about Pulse Shape, see “Quick Edit” (page 32).

Settings: -100 – +100

Smooth (Motion Sequencer Smooth)

Determines the Smoothness of Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene. For details

about Smoothness, see “Quick Edit” (page 32).

Settings: -64 – +63

Random (Motion Sequencer Random)

Determines the “Random” of Motion Sequence for each Part in the selected Scene. For details about

Random, see “Quick Edit” (page 32).

Settings: 0 – 127

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Play/Rec

You can playback/record MIDI data as Songs on this instrument itself or playback/record your

performance (audio data) on a USB flash memory device.

From the MIDI display you can playback/record your keyboard performance with using the selected

Performance to the Song. You can playback/record knob operations, controller operations and Arpeggio

playback as well as your keyboard playing to the specified Track as MIDI events.

 Playback and Playback Standby

Song Name

Indicates the selected Song Name. Touching the parameter calls up the menu for Load and Rename.

Performance Name

Indicates the selected Performance Name.

Time Signature

Indicates the meter of the Song.

Position (Song Position)

Determines the starting position of Recording/Playback. The indicator also shows the current position

during playback.

The measure’s number is in the left cell and the beat number and clocks are in the right cell.

Tempo

Determines the Song tempo.

Settings: 5 – 300

NOTE The tempo can be set as follows.

[PERFORMANCE]  [UTILITY]  [Tempo Settings] (page 180)

Play/Rec

MIDI

Operation Press the [R] (Play) button, or

[PERFORMANCE]  [Play/Rec]  [MIDI]

Song Length

Track P lay Swi tc h

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Store Tempo

Changes the Song tempo to the currently selected Tempo.

This parameter is not available during:

• New recording (No previously recorded Song data.)

• Playback

• Recording Standby

• Recording

Save As .mid File

Calls up the Store/Save display to save the Song as a file.

This button is not available during:

• New recording (No previously recorded Song data.)

• Playback

• Recording Standby

• Recording

• An external memory such as a USB flash memory device is not connected.

Song Length

Indicates the length of the entire sequence.

Track Play Switch

Switches the playback for each track on/off.

Settings: Off, On

 Record and Record Standby

Time Signature

Determines the meter of the Song.

Settings: 1/16 – 16/16, 1/8 – 16/8, 1/4 – 8/4

Rec Quantize (Record Quantize)

Quantization is the process of adjusting the timing of note events by moving them closer to the nearest

exact beat. You can use this feature, for example, to improve the timing of a performance recorded in real

time. Record quantize aligns the timing of notes automatically, as you record.

Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),

480 (1/4 note), Off

Operation Press the [I] (Record) button, or

[PERFORMANCE]  [Play/Rec]  [MIDI]  [I] (Record) button

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Record Type

Determines the Recording Type. This parameter is not available for the first recording.

Settings: Replace, Overdub, Punch

Replace: You can use this method when you want to overwrite an already recorded Track with new data in real time.

The original data will be erased.

Overdub: You can use this method when you want to add more data to a Track that already contains data.

Previously recorded data will be maintained.

Punch: You can use this method when you want to overwrite data to a specified range of a Track that already

contains data. It allows you to overwrite the already recorded data from the starting point to the ending point

(measure/beat) that was specified before recording.

Punch In

Determines the starting point (measure and beat) for recording. This parameter is available only when

“punch” is selected for “Record Type.”

Punch Out

Determines the ending point (measure and beat) for recording. This parameter is available only when

“punch” is selected for “Record Type.”

NOTE For details about the Punch In/Out setting, see the Owner’s Manual.

Undo

The Undo Job cancels the changes you made in your most recent recording session, restoring the data to

its previous state.

Redo

Redo is available only after using Undo, and lets you restore the changes you made before undoing them.

From the Audio display you can record your performance on the instrument as WAV format (44.1-kHz, 24-

bit, stereo) audio files to a USB flash memory device. It is possible to record continuously for up to 74

minutes (assuming that the USB storage device has sufficient free memory).

 Playback and Playback Standby

Audio Name

Indicates the name of the selected Audio file.

Audio

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [Play/Rec]  [Audio]

Current play position in the

entire audio data

Level meter

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance

Home

Motion Control

Overview

Quick Edit

Arpeggio

Motion Seq

Super Knob

Knob Auto

Mixing

Scene

Play / Rec

MIDI

Audio

Reference

Position (Audio Position)

Determines the starting position of Playback. The indicator also shows the current position during

playback.

Audio Volume

Determines the volume of the Audio Playback. This parameter cannot be changed during recording.

Settings: 0 – 255

Audio Length

Indicates the length of the entire audio data.

Level Meter

Indicates the Audio Input/Output level.

 Record and Record Standby

Recordable (Audio Recordable Time)

Indicates available recording time. This parameter is displayed only during recording standby.

Trigger Level

Determines the method of starting recording. This parameter is displayed only during recording standby.

If you set the trigger level to “manual,” recording will begin whenever you press the [R] (Play) button.

Alternatively, if you set a value between 1 and 127, recording will begin automatically whenever the [R]

(Play) button is pressed and the playback volume exceeds that level. The level set here will be indicated

by blue triangles in the level meter. For best results, set this parameter as low as possible to capture the

entire signal, but not so low as to record unwanted noise.

Settings: manual, 1 – 127

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [Play/Rec]  [Audio]  [I] (Record) button

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

A Normal Part (AWM2) (having pitched musical instrument sounds) can consist of up to eight Elements.

An Element is the basic, smallest unit for a Part. There are two types of Normal Part (AWM2) Edit displays:

Element Common Edit display, for editing settings common to all eight Elements; and Element Edit display,

for editing individual Elements.

Element Common Edit (Common)

From the General display you can set various parameters such as Part Name, Volume, and Pan.

Part Category Main (Part Main Category)

Part Category Sub (Part Sub Category)

Determines the Main category and the Sub category for the selected Part.

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Part Name

Determines the Part name of the selected Part. Part names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the

parameter calls up the input character display.

Volume (Part Volume)

Determines the output level of the selected Part.

Settings: 0 – 127

Pan

Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part.

Settings: L63 – C – R63

Part Settings

General

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 

[Part Settings]  [General]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Dry Level

Determines the dry sound level (without effect processing) of the selected Part. This is available only when

“Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Var Send (Variation Send)

Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Variation effect. This is available only when “Part

Output” is set to “MainL&R.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Rev Send (Reverb Send)

Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part

Output” is set to “MainL&R.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Part Output (Part Output Select)

Determines which audio output is used for the selected Part.

Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB1&2...USB29&30, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1 – 30, Off

MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.

USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.

AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.

USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.

Mono/Poly

Selects monophonic or polyphonic playback for the selected Part. Monophonic is for single notes only, and

polyphonic is for playing multiple simultaneous notes.

Settings: Mono, Poly

Key Assign (Key Assign Mode)

Determines the playing method when the same notes are received continuously, and without

corresponding note off messages. For details, refer to the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Settings: Single, Multi

Single: Double or repeated playback of the same note is not possible. The first note will be stopped, then the next

note will be sounded.

Multi: All notes are sounded simultaneously. This allows playback of the same note when it is played multiple times

in succession (especially for tambourine and cymbal sounds that you would want to ring out to their full decay).

Arp Play Only (Arpeggio Play Only)

Determines whether or not the current Part plays only the note events of the Arpeggio playback. When this

parameter is set to on, only the note events of the Arpeggio playback affect the tone generator block.

Settings: Off, On

Element Pan (Element Pan Switch)

Determines whether the individual pan settings for each Element (made via ([EDIT]  Part selection 

Element selection  [Amplitude]  [Level/Pan]  “Pan”) are applied or not. When this is set to “off,” the

pan position for each Element in the Part is set to center.

Settings: Off, On

Velocity Limit

Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Part will respond.

Each Part will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first specify the

maximum value and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range covers both

“1 to 34” and “93 to 127.” For instructions on setting the Velocity Limit, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

Settings: 1 – 127

Note Limit

Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Part. Each Part will only sound for

notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest note, for

example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.”

Settings: C -2 – G8

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Velocity Depth (Velocity Sensitivity Depth)

Determines the degree to which the resulting volume of the

tone generator responds to your playing strength. The higher

the value, the more the volume changes in response to your

playing strength (as shown below).

Settings: 0 – 127

Velocity Offset (Velocity Sensitivity Offset)

Determines the amount by which played velocities are adjusted for the actual resulting velocity effect. This

lets you raise or lower all velocities based on this setting value—allowing you to automatically compensate

for playing too strongly or too softly.

Settings: 0 – 127

From the Pitch display you can set Pitch-related parameters for the Part.

Portamento Master SW (Portamento Master Switch)

Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the

next. The Portamento Master Switch determines whether Portamento is applied to the entire Performance

or not.

Settings: Off, On

Pitch

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 

[Part Settings]  [Pitch]

127

0127

When Offset (below) is set to 64:

Actual resulting

velocity

(affecting the

tone generator)

Velocity with which you play a note

Depth=127 Depth=64

Depth=32

Depth=0

127

012764 127

127

12764

127

Velocity with which you play a note Velocity with which you play a noteVelocity with which you play a note

Actual

resulting

velocity

(affecting

the tone

generator)

Actual

resulting

velocity

(affecting

the tone

generator)

Actual

resulting

velocity

(affecting

the tone

generator)

When Depth (above) = 64

and Offset = 64

When Depth (above) = 64

and Offset = 96

When Depth (above) = 64

and Offset = 32

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Portamento Part SW (Portamento Part Switch)

Determines whether Portamento is applied to the selected Part or not.

Settings: Off, On

Portamento Mode

Determines the Portamento mode.

Settings: Fingered, Full-time

Fingered: Portamento is only applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous

one).

Full-time: Portamento is applied to all notes.

Portamento Time

Determines the pitch transition time or rate when Portamento is applied.

Settings: 0 – 127

Portamento Time Mode

Determines how the pitch changes in time.

Settings: Rate 1, Time 1, Rate 2, Time 2

Rate 1: Pitch changes at the specified rate.

Time 1: Pitch changes in the specified time.

Rate 2: Pitch changes at the specified rate within an octave.

Time 2: Pitch changes in the specified time within an octave.

Portamento Legato Slope

Determines the speed of the attack of legato notes, when “Mono/Poly” is set to “Mono.” (Legato notes

“overlap” each other, the next being played before the previous is released.)

Settings: 0 – 7

Note Shift

Determines the pitch (key transpose) setting for each Part in semitones.

Settings: -24 – +0 – +24

Detune

Determines the pitch settings of the selected Part in 0.1 Hz increments.

Settings: -12.8Hz – +0.0Hz – +12.7Hz

Pitch Bend / (Pitch Bend Range Upper/Lower)

Determines the maximum Pitch Bend Range in semitones.

Settings: -48 – +0 – +24

Micro Tuning Name

Determines the tuning system for the selected Part. For information on the various tuning systems, see the

Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Settings: Equal Temperament, Pure Major, Pure Minor, Werckmeister, Kirnberger, Vallotti & Young, 1/4 shift, 1/4 tone, 1/8 tone,

Indian, Arabic 1, Arabic 2, Arabic 3, User 1 – 8 (when the User Bank is selected), Library 1-1 – 8-8 (when the Library

file is read)

Micro Tuning Root

Determines the root note for the Micro Tuning function. This root note setting may not be necessary

depending on the “Micro Tuning Name” type.

Settings: C – B

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Edit User Tuning

Calls up the User Micro Tuning Setting display.

Tuning No. (Micro Tuning Number)

Indicates the selected User Micro Tuning Number.

Settings: 1 – 8

Tuning Name (Micro Tuning Name)

Determines the name of the selected User Micro Tuning. Touching the parameter calls up the input

character display.

C, C#, D, D#, E, F, F#, G, G#, A, A#, B

Adjusts the pitch of each note in 1 cent steps determines the Micro Tuning.

Settings: -99 – +99

Initialize

Initializes the selected User Micro Tuning.

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

From the Zone Setting display you can set Zone-related parameters.

You can divide the keyboard into a maximum of eight independent areas (called “Zones”). To each Zone

can be assigned different MIDI channels. This makes it possible to control several Parts of the multi-timbral

tone generator simultaneously by a single keyboard or to control Parts of an external MIDI instrument over

several different channels in addition to the internal Parts of this synthesizer itself—letting you use the

MONTAGE to effectively do the work of several keyboards.

To activate this display, select [UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Advanced], then set “Zone Master” to “ON.”

For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

Zone (Zone Switch)

Determines whether the Zone function is used (on) or not (off). When this is set to off, all of the following

parameters are not available.

Settings: Off, On

Int SW (Internal Switch)

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by playing the keyboard in the range of the selected Zone

are transmitted to the internal tone generator or not.

Settings: Off, On

Transmit Ch (Transmit Channel)

Determines the MIDI Transmit Channel for the selected Zone.

Settings: Ch1 – Ch16, Off

Note Limit

Determines the lowest and highest notes of the range for the selected Zone. The selected Zone will sound

only when you play notes within this range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest note, for

example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.”

Settings: C -2 – G8

Octave Shift

Determines the amount in octaves by which the range of the Zone is shifted up or down. You can adjust the

offset up or down over a maximum range of three octaves.

Settings: -3 – +0 (Default) – +3

Transpose

Determines the amount in semitones by which the range of the Zone is shifted up or down.

Settings: -11 – +0 (Default) – +11

Zone Settings

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 

[Part Settings]  [Zone Settings]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Bank Select (Transmit Bank Select)

Determines whether Bank Select MSB/LSB messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.

This is not available when the Transmit Channel is set to off.

Settings: Off, On

Pgm Change (Transmit Program Change)

Determines whether Program Change messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This

is not available when the Transmit Channel is set to off.

Settings: Off, On

Vol/Exp (Transmit Volume/Expression)

Determines whether volume messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not

available when the Transmit Channel is set to off.

Settings: Off, On

Pan (Transmit Pan)

Determines whether Pan messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not

available when the Transmit Channel is set to off.

Settings: Off, On

MIDI Bank MSB/LSB (Bank Select MSB/LSB)

Determines the Bank numbers to be transmitted to the external tone generator when selecting the

Performance. The Bank consists of MSB and LSB values. This is not available when “Transmit Bank Select”

is set to off.

Settings: 000 – 127

MIDI Pgm Num (Program Change Number)

Determines the Program Change Number to be transmitted to the external tone generator when selecting

the Performance. This is not available when the “Transmit Program Change” is set to off.

Settings: 001 – 128

MIDI Volume

Determines the transmit volume to the external tone generator when selecting the Performance.

This is not available when the Transmit Volume/Expression is set to “off”.

Settings: 0 – 127

MIDI Pan

Determines the Pan to be transmitted to the external tone generator when selecting the Performance.

This is not available when the Transmit Pan is set to “off.”

Settings: L64 – C – R63

MIDI Send

By turning this parameter on, MIDI Bank, MIDI Pgm Number, MIDI Volume, or MIDI Pan is transmitted to

the external tone generator depending on the setting of the Transmit Switch.

This is not available when the Transmit Channel is set to off or when all of the four Transmit Switches are set

to off.

Settings: Off, On

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

From the Zone Transmit display you can set how each individual zone affects transmission of various MIDI

data, such as Control Change and Program Change messages. When the relevant parameter is set to

“on,” playing the selected zone will transmit the corresponding MIDI data.

All settings made in this display are not available when “Transmit Ch” is set to “Off” in the Zone Setting

display.

To activate this display, select [UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Advanced], then set “Zone Master” to “ON.”

For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

Pgm Change (Transmit Program Change)

Determines whether Program Change messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.

Settings: Off, On

Bank Select (Transmit Bank Select)

Determines whether Bank Select MSB/LSB messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.

This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.

Settings: Off, On

Pitch Bend (Transmit Pitch Bend)

Determines whether Pitch Bend messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.

Settings: Off, On

After Touch (Transmit After Touch)

Determines whether After Touch messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.

Settings: Off, On

CC (Transmit Control Change)

Determines whether Control Change messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.

Settings: Off, On

Vol/Exp (Transmit Volume/Expression)

Determines whether volume messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.

This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.

Settings: Off, On

Zone Transmit

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 

[Part Settings]  [Zone Transmit]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Pan (Transmit Pan)

Determines whether Pan messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.

This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.

Settings: Off, On

MW (Transmit Modulation Wheel)

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Modulation Wheel are transmitted to the

external tone generator or not.

This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.

Settings: Off, On

Sustain (Transmit Sustain)

Determines whether Sustain messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.

This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.

Settings: Off, On

FC1/FC2 (Transmit Fool Controller)

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Controller are transmitted to

the external tone generator or not.

This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.

Settings: Off, On

FS (Transmit Foot Switch)

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Switch are transmitted to the

external tone generator or not.

This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.

Settings: Off, On

A. SW1/A. SW2 (Transmit Assignable Switch)

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are

transmitted to the external tone generator or not.

This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.

Settings: Off, On

MS Hold (Transmit Motion Sequencer Hold)

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] button are

transmitted to the external tone generator or not.

This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.

Settings: Off, On

MS Trigger (Transmit Motion Sequencer Trigger)

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button are

transmitted to the external tone generator or not.

This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.

Settings: Off, On

RB (Transmit Ribbon Controller)

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Ribbon Controller are transmitted to the

external tone generator or not.

This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.

Settings: Off, On

BC (Transmit Breath Controller)

Determines whether MIDI messages for Breath Controller are transmitted to the external tone generator or

not.

This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.

Settings: Off, On

A.Knob1 – 8 (Transmit Assignable Knob)

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Assignable Knobs 1 – 8 are transmitted to the

external tone generator or not.

This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.

Settings: Off, On

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

From the Routing display you can determine the Effect connections for Parts.

Element 1 – 8 (Element Connection Switch)

Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Element. The “Thru” setting

lets you bypass the Insertion Effects for the specified element.

Settings: Thru, InsA (Insertion Effect A), InsB (Insertion Effect B)

Insertion FX Switch (Insertion Effect Switch)

Determines whether the Insertion Effect A/B is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

Category (Effect Category)

Type (Effect Type)

Determines the category and type for the selected Effect.

Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the

description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Preset

Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific

applications and situations. You can change how the sound is affected by the selected pre-programmed

settings.

Settings: For a list of all Preset Effects, see the Data List PDF document.

Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part)

The Side Chain/Modulator uses the output from one track to control an effect in a different track. You can

specify the Effect type for activating the feature so that input signals for Parts other than the selected Part

or the audio input signal can control the specified Effect. This may not be active depending on the

particular Effect Type.

Here you can determine the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator.

This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.

Settings: Part 1 – 16, A/D, Master, Off

Effect

Routing

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Effect]

[Routing]

Insertion FX Switch

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type)

Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram

in the display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed. For details, see the section “Effect

connection” (page 19) of the “Basic Structure.”

Settings: Parallel, Ins AB, Ins BA

Rev Send (Reverb Send)

Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the

Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Var Send (Variation Send)

Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the

Variation effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Part Output (Part Output Select)

Determines the specific audio output.

Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB1&2…USB29&30, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1 – 30, Off

MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.

USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.

AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.

USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.

Envelope Follower

Calls up the Envelope Follower setting display. For details on the Envelope Follower, see the “Envelope

Follower Block” (page 20) in the “Basic Structure.”

Part (Input Source)

Displays the Part as “Input Source” for the selected Envelope Follower.

Settings: Master, AD, Part 1 – Part 16

Gain (Envelope Follower Gain)

Determines the Input gain of the Input Source set in “Part.”

Settings: -24dB – 0dB – +24dB

Attack (Envelope Follower Attack)

Determines the attack time of the Envelope Follower.

Settings: 1ms – 40ms

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Release (Envelope Follower Release)

Determines the release time of the Envelope Follower.

Settings: 10ms – 680ms

Input Level

Indicates the Input Level of the signal from the Input Source set in “Part.”

Envelope Follower Output

Indicates the Output Level of the Envelope Follower.

From the Insertion Effect A/Insertion Effect B display you can set parameters related to Insertion Effect.

Insertion FX Switch (Insertion Effect Switch)

Determines whether the selected Insertion Effect is active or not.

Category (Effect Category)

Type (Effect Type)

Determines the category and type for the selected Insertion Effect.

Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the

description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Preset

Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific

applications and situations. You can change how the sound is affected by the selected pre-programmed

settings.

Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect types, see the Data List PDF document.

Ins A (Insertion Effect A)

Ins B (Insertion Effect B)

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Effect]

[Ins A] / [Ins B]

Insertion FX Switch

Effect Parameter

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part)

The Side Chain/Modulator uses the output from one track to control an effect in a different track. You can

specify the Effect type for activating the feature so that input signals for Parts other than the selected Part

or the audio input signal can control the specified Effect. This may not be active depending on the

particular Effect Type.

Here you can determine the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator.

This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.

Settings: Part 1 – 16, A/D, Master, Off

Effect Parameter

Active Effect parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect

parameters, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect parameter,

see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

From the Part Equalizer display you can set parameters related to Part EQ.

3-band EQ / 2-band EQ (3-band EQ/2-band EQ Switch)

Switches displays between 3-band EQ and 2-band EQ.

Settings: 3-band EQ, 2-band EQ

EQ (Part Equalizer)

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Effect] 

[EQ]

Part

3-band EQ 2-band EQInsertion Effect

Part EQ Part EQ

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

When “3-band EQ” is selected

From this display you can make 3-band EQ settings.

EQ Low Gain (3-band EQ Low Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Low band.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

EQ Mid Gain (3-band EQ Middle Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Mid band.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

EQ Hi Gain (3-band EQ High Gain)

Determines the level gain of the High band.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

EQ Low Freq (3-band EQ Low Frequency)

Determines the frequency for the Low band.

Settings: 50.1Hz – 2.00kHz

EQ Mid Freq (3-band EQ Middle Frequency)

Determines the frequency for the Mid band.

Settings: 139.7Hz – 10.1kHz

EQ Hi Freq (3-band EQ High Frequency)

Determines the frequency for the High band.

Settings: 503.8Hz – 14.0kHz

EQ Mid Q (3-band EQ Middle Q)

Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Mid band.

Settings: 0.7 – 10.3

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

When “2-band EQ” is selected

From this display you can make 2-band EQ settings.

EQ1 Type (2-band EQ1 Type)/EQ2 Type (2-band EQ2 Type)

Determines the Equalizer Type.

Settings: Thru, LPF, HPF, Low Shelf, Hi Shelf, Peak/Dip

Thru: This setting bypasses the equalizers leaving the entire signal unaffected.

LPF/HPF: This setting only passes signals below or above the Cutoff Frequency.

Low Shelf/Hi Shelf: This setting attenuates/boosts the signal at frequencies above or below the specified

Frequency setting

Peak/Dip: This setting attenuates/boosts the signal at the specified Frequency setting.

EQ 1 Gain (2-band EQ1 Gain)/EQ 2 Gain (2-band EQ2 Gain)

Determines the level gain of the frequency set in “EQ1 Freq” or “EQ2 Freq.”

This is not active when “EQ Type” is set to “Thru,” “LPF,” or “HPF.”

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

EQ 1 Freq (2-band EQ1 Frequency)/EQ 2 Freq (2-band EQ2 Frequency)

Determines the frequency to be attenuated/boosted.

This is not active when “EQ Type” is set to “Thru.”

Settings: 63Hz – 18.0Hz

–

Low Shelf High Shelf

Gain

Frequency

Gain

Frequency

–

Gain

Frequency

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

EQ 1 Q (2-band EQ1 Q)/EQ 2 Q (2-band EQ2 Q)

Determines the EQ bandwidth for the frequency which is set in “EQ 1 Freq/EQ2 Freq.” This is available

only when “EQ Type” is set to “Peak/Dip.”

Settings: 0.1 – 12.0

NOTE For details on EQ structure, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Output Level (2-band Output Level)

Determines the Output level of the 2-band EQ.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

From the Common display you can set Arpeggio-related parameters for the Part.

Arp Part (Part Arpeggio Switch)

Determines whether the Arpeggio for the selected Part is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch)

Determines whether the Arpeggio for the entire Performance is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value)

Determines the actual timing at which the next Arpeggio playback starts when you trigger it while the

Arpeggios for Parts are being played back. When set to “off,” the next Arpeggio starts as soon as you

trigger it. The number shown at right of each value indicates the resolution in clocks.

Settings: Off, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),

480 (1/4 note)

Arpeggio

Common

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Arpeggio]

 [Common]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Hold

Determines whether the Arpeggio continues cycling after the keys are released.

Settings: Sync-off, Off, On

Sync-off: Arpeggio playback continues to run silently, even when you release the keys. Pressing any key turns

Arpeggio playback on again, and the Arpeggio is heard from the point in the cycle where playback is resumed.

Off: The Arpeggio plays only while you hold the keys.

On: The Arpeggio cycles automatically, even if you release your fingers from the keys.

Key Mode

Determines how the Arpeggio plays back when playing the keyboard.

Settings: Sort, Thru, Direct, Sort+Drct, Thru+Drct

Sort: When you play specific notes (for example, the notes of a chord), the same sequence plays, no matter what

order you play the notes.

Thru: When you play specific notes (for example, the notes of a chord), the resulting sequence differs depending on

the order of the notes.

Direct: Note events of the Arpeggio sequence do not play; only the notes you play on the keyboard are heard. When

the Arpeggio plays back, events such as Pan and Brightness are applied to the sound of your keyboard

performance. Use this setting when the Arpeggio types include non-note data or when you set the Arpeggio

Category to Control.

Sort+Drct: The Arpeggio plays back according to the Sort setting, and the notes played are also sounded.

Thru+Drct: The Arpeggio plays back according to the Thru setting, and the notes played are also sounded.

Velocity (Velocity Rate)

Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. If the resulting

Velocity value is 0, it will be set to 1. If the resulting Velocity value is greater than 128 it will be set to 127.

Settings: 0% – 200%

Gate Time (Gate Time Rate)

Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. If the

resulting Gate Time value is 0, it will be set to 1.

Settings: 0% – 200%

Change Timing

Determines the actual timing at which the Arpeggio type is switched when you select another type during

Arpeggio playback. When set to “Real-time,” the Arpeggio type is switched immediately. When set to

“Measure,” the Arpeggio type is switched at the top of the next measure.

Settings: Real-time, Measure

Loop

Determines whether the Arpeggio plays through a single time or continuously, while notes are held.

Settings: Off, On

Arp Play Only (Arpeggio Play Only)

Determines whether or not the current Part plays only the note events of the Arpeggio playback. When this

parameter is set to on, only the note events of the Arpeggio playback affect the tone generator block.

Settings: Off, On

Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid)

Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is

displayed in clocks.

For Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length.

Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),

480 (1/4 note)

Qntz Strength (Quantize Strength)

This parameter sets the “strength” by which note events are pulled toward the quantize beat set in “Arp/MS

Grid.” A setting of 100% produces exact timing set in “Arp/MS Grid.” A setting of 0% results in no

quantization.

Settings: 0% – 100%

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Unit (Part Unit Multiply)

Adjusts the Arpeggio playback time. By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio from the

original one.

Settings: 50%, 66%, 75%, 100%, 133%, 150%, 200%, 266%, 300%, 400%, Common

200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.

100%: The normal playback time.

50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.

Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.

Swing

Delays notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel.

• +1 and higher: Delay the Arpeggio notes.

• -1 and lower: Advance the Arpeggio notes.

• 0: Exact timing as set by “Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid” Value, resulting in no swing.

Judicious use of this setting lets you create swing rhythms and triplet feels, such as shuffle and bounce.

Settings: -120 – +120

Velocity Limit (Arpeggio Velocity Limit)

Determines the minimum and maximum Velocity values in which the Arpeggio responds. Each Arpeggio

will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first specify the maximum value

and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range covers both “1 to 34” and “93

to 127.”

Settings: 1 – 127

Note Limit (Arpeggio Note Limit)

Determines the lowest and highest notes in the Arpeggio’s note range. Each Arpeggio will only sound for

notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest note, for

example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.”

Settings: C -2 – G8

Octave Shift (Arpeggio Output Octave Shift)

Shifts the pitch of the Arpeggio up or down in octaves.

Settings: -10 – +0 – +10

Octave Range (Arpeggio Octave Range)

Specifies the maximum Arpeggio range in octaves.

Settings: -3 – +0 – +3

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

From the Individual display you can set parameters corresponding to Arpeggio Selects 1 – 8.

Touching the Arpeggio Type Setting calls up a menu. In the displayed menu, touch [Search] to call up the

Arpeggio Category Search display (page 163) and touch [Number] to determine the Arpeggio Type by

specifying the Arpeggio Number.

Arp Part (Part Arpeggio Switch)

Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch)

Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value)

Same as in the Common display.

Arp (Arpeggio Select)

Selects the desired Arpeggio stored as Arpeggio Select.

Settings: 1 – 8

Category (Arpeggio Category)

Indicates the selected Arpeggio Category.

Settings: See the “Arpeggio Category List” on page 11.

Sub (Arpeggio Sub Category)

Indicates the selected Arpeggio Sub Category.

Settings: See the “Arpeggio Sub Category List” on page 11.

Name (Arpeggio Name)

Indicates the selected Arpeggio Name.

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Velocity (Velocity Rate)

Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. If the resulting

Velocity value is 0, it will be set to 1. If the resulting Velocity value is greater than 128 it will be set to 127.

Settings: -100% – +100%

Gate Time (Gate Time Rate)

Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. If the

resulting Gate Time value is 0, it will be set to 1.

Settings: -100% – +100%

Individual

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Arpeggio]

 [Individual]

Arpeggio Type Settings

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

From the Advanced display you can set advanced parameters related to the Arpeggio function.

Arp Part (Part Arpeggio Switch)

Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch)

Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value)

Same as in the Common display.

Accent Vel Threshold (Accent Velocity Threshold)

Determines the minimum velocity that will trigger the Accent Phrase.

Accent Phrases are composed of sequence data included in some Arpeggio types, sounding only when

you play notes at a velocity higher (stronger) than that specified in the Accent Velocity Threshold

parameter. If it is difficult to play at velocities necessary to trigger the Accent Phrase, set the “Accent Vel

Threshold” (Accent Velocity Threshold) parameter to a lower value.

NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use this function, refer to the Data List PDF document.

Settings: off, 1 – 127

Accent Start Quantize

Determines the start timing of the Accent Phrase when the Velocity specified in Accent Velocity Threshold

above is received. When this is set to off, the Accent Phrase starts as soon as the Velocity is received.

When this is set to on, the Accent Phrase starts on the beat specified for each Arpeggio type after the

Velocity is received.

Settings: off, on

Random SFX

Determines whether Random SFX is active or not.

Some Arpeggio types feature a Random SFX function which will trigger special sounds (such as guitar fret

noises) when the note is released.

NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use this function, refer to the “Arpeggio Type List” in the Data List PDF

document.

Settings: off, on

Random SFX Velocity Offset

Determines the offset value by which the Random SFX notes will be shifted from their original velocities.

Settings: -64 – +0 – +63

Advanced

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] [Arpeggio] 

[Advanced]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Random SFX Key On Ctrl (Random SFX Key On Control)

When this is set to “on,” the Random SFX sound is played at the velocity generated by the playing of each

note. When this is set to “off,” a special Random SFX sound is played at a pre-programmed velocity.

Settings: off, on

Velocity Mode

Adjusts the velocity of the Arpeggio notes.

Settings: Original, Thru

Original: The Arpeggio plays back at the Velocity set for the Arpeggio Type.

Thru: The Arpeggio plays back according to the Velocity of your playing.

Trigger Mode

When this is set to “Gate,” pressing the note starts Arpeggio playback and releasing the note stops it.

When this is set to “Toggle,” pressing the note starts/stops Arpeggio playback and releasing the note does

not affect Arpeggio playback.

Settings: Gate, Toggle

From the Common display you can set the parameters related to Motion Sequencer for the Part.

Common Clock Swing (Common Swing)

Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This is the offset

value for the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for each Part.

Settings: -120 – +120

Common Clock Unit (Common Unit Multiply)

Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the entire Performance.

This parameter is applied to the Part when the Unit Multiply parameter for Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer of

the Part is set to “Common.”

By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer type from the original one.

Settings: 50% – 400%

200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.

100%: The normal playback time.

50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.

Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer)

Common

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Motion Seq]

 [Common]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Common Arp Gate Time (Common Arpeggio Gate Time)

Determines the Gate Time Rate (length) of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value

for the Gate Time Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.

Settings: -100% – +100%

Common Arp Velocity (Common Arpeggio Velocity Rate)

Determines the Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the

Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.

Settings: -100% – +100%

Common Motion Seq Amplitude (Common Motion Sequencer Amplitude)

Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Amplitude” determines

how the entire Motion Sequence changes.

This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Amplitude, which is also the offset value for the Lane

Amplitude. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Amplitudes offset the Amplitude setting in

the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).

Settings: -64 – +63

Common Motion Seq Shape (Common Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)

Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This changes the step

curve shape of the sequence.

This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Pulse Shape, which is also the offset value for the Lane

Pulse Shape. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Pulse Shapes offset the Pulse Shape

setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on

for the parameter).

Settings: -100 – +100

Common Motion Seq Smooth (Common Motion Sequencer Smoothness)

Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Smoothness” is the

degree to which the time of the Motion Sequence is smoothly changed.

This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Smoothness, which is also the offset value for the Lane

Smoothness. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Smoothnesses offset the Smoothness

setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).

Settings: -64 – +63

Common Motion Seq Random (Common Motion Sequencer Random)

Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Random” is the degree to

which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.

This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Random when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane.

Settings: -64 – +63

Part Clock Swing (Clock Swing)

Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. This parameter delays

notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel.

• +1 and higher: Delay the Arpeggio notes.

• -1 and lower: Advance the Arpeggio notes.

• 0: Exact timing as set by “Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid” Value, resulting in no swing.

Judicious use of this setting lets you create swing rhythms and triplet feels, such as shuffle and bounce.

Settings: -120 – +120

Part Clock Unit (Part Unit Multiply)

This adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the selected Part.

Settings: 50% – 400%, Common

200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.

100%: The normal playback time.

50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.

Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.

Part Arp Gate Time (Part Arpeggio Gate Time)

Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. This is

the offset value for the Gate Time Rate (page 76) of each Arpeggio Select setting.

Settings: 0% – 200%

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Part Arp Velocity (Part Arpeggio Velocity Rate)

Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. This is the offset

value for the Velocity Rate (page 76) of each Arpeggio Select setting.

Settings: 0% – 200%

Part Motion Seq Amplitude (Part Motion Sequencer Amplitude)

Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.

This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Amplitude (page 83) when “MS FX” is set to on for the

Lane.

Settings: -64 – +63

Part Motion Seq Shape (Part Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)

Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.

This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq “Step Curve Parameter” (page 84) when “MS FX” is set to

on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on for the parameter.

Settings: -100 – +100

Part Motion Seq Smooth (Part Motion Sequencer Smoothness)

Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.

This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Smoothness (page 83) when “MS FX” is set to on for the

Lane.

Settings: -64 – +63

Part Motion Seq Random (Part Motion Sequencer Random)

Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. “Random” is the degree to which

the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.

Settings: 0 – 127

Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid)

Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is

displayed in clocks.

For Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length.

Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),

480 (1/4 note)

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

From the Lane display you can set parameters for each Lane of the Motion Sequencer.

Motion Seq Master SW (Motion Sequencer Master Switch)

Determines whether the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

Motion Seq Part SW (Motion Sequencer Part Switch)

Determines whether the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

Lane SW (Lane Switch)

Determines whether each Lane is active or not. Up to four Lanes of Motion Sequencer can be used for one

Part and up to eight Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire Performance. When this is set to off,

parameters related to the corresponding Lane will not be displayed.

Settings: Off, On

MS FX (Lane Motion Sequencer FX Receive)

Determines whether or not the selected Lane is affected by Knob operations when the corresponding

Knob Function [ARP/MS FX] button is set to on.

Settings: Off, On

Trigger (Lane Motion Sequencer Trigger Receive)

Determines whether or not the selected Lane receives the signal generated by [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER]

button. When this is set to on, the Motion Sequence will begin whenever you press the [MOTION SEQ

TRIGGER] button.

Settings: Off, On

Sequence Select (Lane Motion Sequence Select)

Selects the desired Motion Sequence.

Settings: 1 – 8

Lane

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Motion Seq]

 [Lane]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Sync (Lane Motion Sequencer Sync)

Determines if the playback of the Motion Sequence applied to the Destination (set in the Control Assign

display (page 89)) is synchronized to the Tempo, Beat, or Arpeggio of the Performance.

Settings: Off, Tempo, Beat, Arp, Lane 1 (when Lane 2 – 4 is selected)

Off: Lane Motion Sequencer plays back according to its own clock and is not synchronized to an external clock.

Tempo: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the Performance tempo.

Beat: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the beat.

Arp: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the 1st beat of the measure of the currently playing Arpeggio.

Lane 1: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the Lane 1.

Speed (Lane Motion Sequencer Speed)

Determines the playback speed of the Motion Sequence.

This is available only when the “Lane Motion Sequencer Sync” is set to “Off.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Unit Multiply (Lane Motion Sequencer Unit Multiply)

Adjusts the Motion Sequencer playback time for the selected Lane.

This is available when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than “Off” and

“Lane 1.”

Settings: 50% – 6400%, Common, Arp

200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.

100%: The normal playback time.

50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.

Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.

Arp: The value set in the Arpeggio Unit Multiply for the selected Part will be applied.

Key On Reset (Lane Motion Sequencer Key On Reset)

Determines whether or not the playback of the Motion Sequence is stopped when you play the keyboard.

This parameter is active when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than

“Arp” and “Lane 1.”

Also this parameter is not available when “Trigger” is set to “On.”

Settings: Off, Each-On, 1st-On

Each-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequence from the beginning.

1st-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequencer from the beginning. If you play a

second note while the first is being held, the Sequence continues cycling according to the same phase as triggered

by the first note—in other words, the Sequence only resets if the first note is released before the second is played.

Loop (Lane Motion Sequencer Loop)

Determines whether the Motion Sequence is played only once or repeatedly.

This is available when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than “Lane 1.”

Settings: Off, On

Velocity Limit (Lane Motion Sequencer Velocity Limit)

Determines the minimum and maximum Velocity values in which the Motion Sequence responds.

This is available when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than “Lane 1.”

Settings: 1 – 127

Cycle (Lane Motion Sequencer Cycle)

Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence.

Settings: 1 – 16

Load Sequence

Loads Motion Sequence data in the User Memory. For details about Loading, see “Load” (page 174).

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Edit Sequence

Calls up the Motion Sequence setting display. You can create a custom Sequence consisting of up to

sixteen steps.

Lane (Current Select Lane)

Indicates the currently selected Lane. This parameter is not displayed when the corresponding Lane

Switch is set to off.

Settings: 1 – 4

Cycle (Lane Motion Sequencer Cycle)

Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence.

Settings: 1 – 16

Amplitude (Lane Motion Sequencer Amplitude)

Determines how the entire Motion Sequence changes.

Settings: 0 – 127

Smooth (Lane Motion Sequencer Smoothness)

Determines the smoothness of the time change of the Motion Sequence.

Settings: 0 – 127

Sequence Select (Lane Motion Sequence Select)

Determines the Motion Sequence Select.

Settings: 1 – 8

Polarity (Lane Motion Sequencer Polarity)

Determines the Sequence Polarity.

Settings: Unipolar, Bipolar

Unipolar: Unipolar changes only in a positive direction from a base parameter value according to the Sequence.

Bipolar: Bipolar changes in both of positive and negative directions from a base parameter value.

Motion Seq Step Value (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Value)

Determines the Step Value for the Motion Sequence. You can control the Step Value 1 – 8 or 9 – 16 by the

Sliders 1 – 8 depending on the cursor position on the display.

Settings: 0 – 127

Motion Seq Step Value (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Value)

Motion Seq Step Type (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Type)

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Motion Seq Step Type (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Type)

Determines each Step Type of the Motion Sequence. You can switch between the Step Types A and B for

the Step 1 – 8 or 9 – 16 by the SCENE [1] – [8] buttons depending on the cursor position on the display.

Settings: A, B

Pulse A / Pulse B (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Curve Type)

Determines the Curve Type of the parameter for each of “Pulse A” and “Pulse B.” “Motion Seq Step Type”

described above determines which curve set here is used for each step.

Settings: For Preset Bank: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle,

Square, Trapezoid, Tilt Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold

For details, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

For User Bank: User 1 – 32

When a Library file is read: Curves in Library 1 – 8

Direction (Lance Motion Sequencer Step Curve Direction)

Determines the Direction of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence.

Settings: Forward, Reverse

Prm1/Prm2 (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Curve Parameter)

Adjusts the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence.

This parameter is not available depending on the Curve Type. Also the range of available parameter

values differs depending on the Curve Type.

Control (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Curve Shape Control Switch)

Determines whether or not to control the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence by operating

Knobs. This parameter is displayed only when “MS FX” is set to on. Also this parameter is not available

depending on the Curve Type.

Settings: Off, On

Store Sequence

Stores the edited Sequence data. For details about storing data, see “Store/Save” (page 176).

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

From the Part LFO display you can set the LFO-related parameters for the Part.

LFO Wave

Selects the LFO waveform.

Settings: Triangle, Triangle+, Saw Up, Saw Down, Squ1/4, Squ1/3, Square, Squ2/3, Squ3/4, Trapezoid, S/H1, S/H2, User

Tempo Sync (LFO Tempo Sync)

Determines whether or not the LFO is synchronized to the tempo of the Arpeggio or Song.

Settings: Off (not synchronized), On (synchronized)

Mod/Control (Modulation/Control)

Part LFO

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 

[Mod/Control]  [Part LFO]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

When “Tempo Sync” is set to “OFF”

Speed (LFO Speed)

Adjusts the speed (frequency) of LFO variation. This is not available when the Tempo Sync parameter

is set to “On.”

Settings: 0 – 63

Random Speed (LFO Random Speed Depth)

Determines the degree to which the LFO speed changes at random.

Settings: 0 – 127

When “Tempo Sync” is set to “ON”

Tempo Speed (LFO Tempo Speed)

This parameter is available only when “Tempo Sync” above has been set to “ON.” It allows you to make

detailed note value settings that determine how the LFO pulses in sync with the Arpeggio.

Settings: 1/16, 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8, 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot.

(dotted eighth notes), 1/4, 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2, Whole Tri. (whole-note

triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 5

(quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the

beat), 1/4 x 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight

quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 16 (sixteen quarter-notes to the beat), 1/4 x 32 (32 quarter notes to the beat),

1/4 x 64 (64 quarter notes to the beat)

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Delay (LFO Delay Time)

Determines the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the LFO

comes into effect.

Settings: 0 – 127

Fade In (LFO Fade In Time)

Determines the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade in (after the “Delay” time has elapsed).

Settings: 0 – 127

Hold (LFO Hold Time)

Determines the length of time during which the LFO is held at its maximum level.

Settings: 0 – 126, Hold

Hold: No fade-out

Fade Out (LFO Fade Out Time)

Determines the time over which the LFO effect is faded out (after the “Hold” time has elapsed).

Settings: 0 – 127

Key On Reset (LFO Key On Reset)

Determines whether or not the LFO is reset each time a note is pressed.

Settings: Off, Each-On, 1st-On

Each-On: The LFO resets with each note you play and starts a waveform at the phase specified by the Phase

parameter.

1st-On: The LFO resets with each note you play and starts a waveform at the phase specified by the Phase

parameter. If you play a second note while the first is being held, the LFO continues cycling according to the same

phase as triggered by the first note—in other words, the LFO only resets if the first note is released before the second

is played.

Loop (LFO Loop)

Determines whether the LFO Wave plays through a single time (off) or continuously (on).

Settings: Off, On

Phase (LFO Phase)

Determines the starting phase point for the LFO Wave when it is reset.

Settings: 0°, 90°, 120°, 180°, 240°, 270°

Element Phase Offset (LFO Element Phase Offset)

Determines the offset values of the “Phase” parameter (above) for the respective Elements.

Settings: 0°, 90°, 120°, 180°, 240°, 270°

Destination (LFO Destination)

Determines the functions which will be controlled by the LFO Wave.

Settings: Insertion Effect A Parameter 1 – 24, Insertion Effect B Parameter 1 – 24, Level, Pitch, Cutoff, Resonance, Pan, E.LFO

Speed

Depth (LFO Depth)

Set the LFO Wave Depth (amplitude) for “Destination” parameter (above).

Settings: 0 – 127

Element Depth Ratio (LFO Element Depth Ratio)

Determines the offset values of the “Depth” parameter (above) for the respective Elements.

When set to “Off,” the LFO effect is not available. This is available only when Element-related parameters

are set in “Destination.”

Settings: Off, 0 – 127

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Edit User LFO

Calls up the User LFO Setting display. You can create a custom LFO wave consisting of up to sixteen

steps.

Cycle

Selects the desired step length for the LFO.

Settings: 2 steps, 3 steps, 4 steps, 6 steps, 8 steps, 12 steps, 16 steps

Slope

Determines the slope or ramp characteristics of the LFO wave.

Settings: Off (no slope), Up, Down, Up&Down

User LFO Step Value

Determines the level for each step.

Settings: -64 – +63

Template

This includes pre-programmed settings for creating an original LFO.

User LFO Step Value

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

From the Control Assign display you can make controller assign settings for the Part.

You can change sounds as desired by setting the desired controller to “Source” and the desired parameter

to “Destination.” Not only physical controllers such as the Pitch Bend wheel but also Motion Sequencer or

Envelope Follower can be set to “Source” as a virtual controller.

Up to 16 Controller Sets can be assigned to each Part.

Auto Select (Auto Select Switch)

Determines whether the Auto Select function for Display Filter (below) is active (On) or not (Off). When this

parameter is set to “On,” the operated Controller is automatically set in “Display Filter”. Also you can obtain

the same result by pressing the [CONTROL ASSIGN] button.

Settings: Off, On

Display Filter

Determines the Controller to be displayed.

Settings: PitchBend, Modwheel, AfterTouch, FootCtrl 1, FootCtrl 2, FootSwitch, Ribbon, Breath, AsgnKnob 1 – 8, AsgnSw 1,

AsgnSw 2, MS Lane 1 – 4, EnvFollow 1 – 16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst

Display Name

Determines the name of each Assignable Knob 1 – 8 which is displayed in the Performance Play display

(page 26). This is available only when “AsgnKnob 1 – 8” is set in “Source.”

Destination

Determines the target parameter to be controlled. To add another Destination, touch “+” icon. For

information on setting examples for “Destination,” see below.

Settings: See the “Control List” in the Data List PDF document.

Destination Setting Examples

The following settings are some useful examples how to set the Destination.

Concerning *1 and *2, the following settings are necessary in addition to the above settings.

*1 “Ins A/B Type” = “Rotary Speaker” in the Effect display of Part Edit

*2 “Ins A/B Type” = “VCM Pedal Wah” in the Effect display of Part Edit

Control Assign

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 

[Mod/Control]  [Control Assign]

To control the volume: Part Param  Volume

To change the pitch: Part Param  Pitch

To change the speed of the Rotary Speaker: Ins A/B  InsA/B SpdCtrl *1

To apply a Wah pedal effect: Ins A/B  InsA/B PdlCtrl *2

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Source

Determines the desired Controller for controlling the parameter set in “Destination.”

Settings: PitchBend, Modwheel, AfterTouch, FootCtrl 1, FootCtrl 2, FootSwitch, Ribbon, Breath, AsgnKnob 1 – 8, AsgnSw 1,

AsgnSw 2, MS Lane 1 – 4, EnvFollow 1 – 16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst

Element SW (Element Switch)

Selects whether the controller will affect each individual Element (On) or not (Off). This is available only

when Element-related parameters are set in “Destination.”

Settings: Off, On

Curve Type

Determines the Curve type of the parameter set in “Destination.” In the illustrations below, the vertical axis

indicates the operation value of the controller set in “Destination” and the horizontal axis indicates the

parameter value set in “Source.”

Settings: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle, Square, Trapezoid, Tilt

Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold, User 1 – 32 (when User Bank is selected), Library 1 – 8 (when the

Library file is read)

Standard

Sigmoid

Threshold

Bell

Dogleg

Discrete Saw

Smooth Saw

Triangle

Square

Trapezoid

Tilt Sine

Bounce

Resonance

Sequence

Hold

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Polarity (Curve Polarity)

Determines the Curve Polarity of the Curve type set in “Curve Type.”

Settings: Uni, Bi

Uni: Unipolar changes only in a positive direction or in a negative direction from a base parameter value according

to the Curve shape.

Bi: Bipolar changes in both of positive and negative directions from a base parameter value.

Ratio (Curve Ratio)

Determines the Curve Ratio.

Settings: -64 – +63

Param 1/Param 2 (Curve Parameter)

Adjusts the Curve shape.

This is not available depending on the Curve Type.

Destination to Name

Copies the Parameter name from “Destination” to “Display Name.” This is available only when “Source” is

set to “AsgnKnob 1 – 8.”

Delete

Deletes the selected “Destination.”

Edit User Curve

Calls up the User Curve Setting display. You can select “Linear” (Curve by Linear Interpolation of eight

coefficients) or “Step.”

Curve No. (Curve Number)

Indicates the selected Curve Number.

Settings: 1 – 32

Curve Name

Names the selected Curve. Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.

Curve Type

Determines the Curve Type.

Settings: Linear, Step

Input

Determines the Input level of the Curve. “Input 1” is fixed to “0.” “Input 8” is fixed to 127 when the Curve

Type is “Linear.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Output

Determines the Output level of the Curve.

Settings: 0 – 127

From the Receive Switch display you can set how each individual Part responds to various MIDI data, such

as Control Change and Program Change messages. When the relevant parameter is set to “ON,” the

corresponding Part responds to the appropriate MIDI data.

NOTE If CC (Receive Control Change) here is set to “OFF,” parameters related to Control Change are not available.

Pgm Change (Receive Program Change)

Determines whether Program Change messages are received or not.

Settings: Off, On

Bank Select (Receive Bank Select)

Determines whether Bank Select MSB/LSB messages are received or not.

This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.

Settings: Off, On

Pitch Bend (Receive Pitch Bend)

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Pitch Bend Wheel are received or not.

Settings: Off, On

After Touch (Receive After Touch)

Determines whether After Touch messages are received or not.

Settings: Off, On

CC (Receive Control Change)

Determines whether Control Change messages are received or not.

Settings: Off, On

Vol/Exp (Receive Volume/Expression)

Determines whether volume messages are received or not.

This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.

Settings: Off, On

Receive SW (Receive Switch)

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 

[Mod/Control]  [Receive SW]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Pan (Receive Pan)

Determines whether Pan messages are received or not.

This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.

Settings: Off, On

MW (Receive Modulation Wheel)

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Modulation Wheel are received or not.

This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.

Settings: Off, On

Sustain (Receive Sustain)

Determines whether Sustain messages are received or not.

This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.

Settings: Off, On

FC1/FC2 (Receive Foot Controller)

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Controller are received or

not.

This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.

Settings: Off, On

FS (Receive Foot Switch)

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Switch are received or not.

This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.

Settings: Off, On

A. SW1/A. SW2 (Receive Assignable Switch)

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are

received or not.

This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.

Settings: Off, On

MS Hold (Receive Motion Sequencer Hold)

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] button are received

or not.

This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.

Settings: Off, On

MS Trigger (Receive Motion Sequencer Trigger)

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button are

received or not.

This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.

Settings: Off, On

RB (Receive Ribbon Controller)

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Ribbon Controller are received or not.

This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.

Settings: Off, On

BC (Receive Breath Controller)

Determines whether MIDI messages for Breath Controller are received or not.

This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.

Settings: Off, On

A.Knob 1 – 8 (Receive Assignable Knob)

Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Assignable Knobs 1 – 8 are received or not.

This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.

Settings: Off, On

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Element Edit (Element)

From the Oscillator/Tune display you can assign the waveform (or basic sound material) to each Element.

You can set the note range for the Element (the range of notes on the keyboard over which the Element will

sound) as well as the velocity response (the range of note velocities within which the Element will sound).

Bank (Waveform Bank)

Number (Waveform Number)

Category (Waveform Category)

Sub Category (Waveform Sub Category)

Name (Waveform Name)

Indicates the information of the waveform used for the selected Element. “Bank” indicates which waveform

location (Preset, User and Library) is assigned to the Element.

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Element Switch

Determines whether the currently selected Element is on or off.

Settings: Off, On

XA Control

Determines the functioning of the Expanded Articulation (XA) feature of an Element.

The XA feature is sophisticated tone generator system that allows you to more effectively recreate realistic

sound and natural performance techniques. It also provides other unique modes for random and alternate

sound changes as you play. For details on the XA feature, see the “Tone Generator Block” in the “Basic

Structure” on page 6.

Settings: Normal, Legato, Key Off, Cycle, Random, A.SW Off, A.SW1 On, A.SW2 On

For each Element, you can set to:

Normal: The Element sounds normally each time you play the note.

Legato: When the Mono/Poly parameter is set to Mono, this Element will be played in place of the one which is set to

“Normal” of the XA Control parameter when you play the keyboard in legato fashion (playing the next note of a

single-note line or melody before releasing the previous note).

Key Off: The Element will sound each time you release the note.

Cycle (for multiple Elements): Each Element sounds alternately according to its numerical order. In other words,

playing the first note will sound Element 1, the second note Element 2, and so on.

Random (for multiple Elements): Each Element will sound randomly each time you play the note.

Osc/Tune (Oscillator/Tune)

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Osc/Tune]

Element Switch

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

A.SW1 On: When the [ASSIGN 1] button is turned On, the Element will sound.

A.SW2 On: When the [ASSIGN 2] button is turned On, the Element will sound.

A.SW Off: When both the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are turned Off, the Element will sound.

Elem Group (Element Group)

Determines the group for XA Control. All Elements that have the same type of XA features must have the

same group number. This setting does not apply when the XA Control parameters of all Elements are set to

Normal.

Settings: 1 – 8

Elem Connect (Element Connection Switch)

Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Element. Set this to “Thru” to

bypass the Insertion Effects for the specified element.

Settings: Thru, InsA, InsB

New Waveform

Loads Audio data stored in the USB flash memory as “Waveform.” For details on loading, see “Load”

(page 174).

After the Waveform is loaded, the Edit Waveform parameter (below) will be available.

Coarse (Coarse Tune)

Determines the pitch of each Element in semitones.

Settings: -48 – +48

Fine (Fine Tune)

Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Element.

Settings: -64 – 63

Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity)

Determines how the pitch of the selected Element responds to velocity.

Settings: -64 – 63

Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises.

Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls.

0: No change in pitch.

Fine/Key (Pitch Fine Key Follow Sensitivity)

Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the pitch in

Fine Tuning.

Settings: -64 – 63

Positive values: The pitch of lower notes drops and that of higher notes rises.

Negative values: The pitch of lower notes rises and that of higher notes drops.

Random (Random Pitch Depth)

Allows you to randomly vary the pitch of the Element for each note you play. The higher the value, the

greater the pitch variation.

Settings: 0 – 127

Vel Cross Fade (Velocity Cross Fade)

Determines how gradually the volume of an Oscillator decreases in proportion to the distance of Velocity

changes outside the Velocity Limit setting.

Settings: 0 – 127

The higher the value, the more gradually the volume decreases.

0: No sound

Tempo Sync (Key On Delay Tempo Sync Switch)

Determines whether or not “Key On Delay” (below) is synchronized to the tempo.

Settings: Off, On

Length (Key On Delay Time Length)

Determines the time (or elapsed delay) between the moment you press a note on the keyboard and the

point at which the sound is actually played. You can set different delay times for each Element. This is not

available when “Key On Delay Tempo Sync” is set to on.

Settings: 0 – 127

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Length (Key On Delay Note Length)

Determines the timing of “Key On Delay” when “Key On Delay Tempo Sync” is set to on.

Settings: 1/16, 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8, 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot.

(dotted eighth notes), 1/4, 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2, Whole Tri. (whole-note

triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 5

(quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the

beat), 1/4 x 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter

notes to the beat)

Velocity Limit

Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Element will

respond. Each Element will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first

specify the maximum value and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range

covers both “1 to 34” and “93 to 127.”

Settings: 1 – 127

Note Limit

Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Element. Each Element will only

sound for notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest

note, for example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.”

Settings: C -2 – G8

Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity)

Determines the sensitivity of the Key Follow effect (the pitch interval of adjacent notes), assuming the pitch

of the Center Key (below) as standard.

Settings: -200% – +0% – +200%

+100% (the normal setting): Adjacent notes are pitched one semitone apart.

0%: All notes have the same pitch as the Center Key.

Negative values: The settings are reversed.

Center Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)

Determines the central note or pitch for the Key Follow effect on pitch.

Settings: C -2 – G8

Edit Waveform

Calls up the Waveform Edit display.

From this display you can set parameters related to Key Banks consisting of the Waveform.

•Key Bank

A Key Bank is digital audio data, made by directly recording a signal, such as that of vocals or

electric guitar, to this instrument.

Throughout this manual, the words “Key Bank” and “Wave” are sometimes used interchangeably;

however, you should be careful to distinguish between “Key Bank” (raw audio data) and “Waveform”

(collected audio data used to make up a Part).

• Key Bank and Waveform

Key Banks are assigned and stored to Waveforms on the MONTAGE.

Each of the Waveforms can contain multiple Key Banks. To assign these Key Banks to a different

space or container, you can set the note limit and velocity limit for each Key Bank. With this setting,

the different Key Bank is played back depending on the pressed note and its velocity.

127

D#2 A#2 G#3F4

Waveform

Velocity

Key Number

(Note Number)

Key

Bank 1

Key Bank 2 Key Bank 4

Key Bank 3 Key Bank 5

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

• Part and Waveform

You can play the Waveform by assigning it to a Part then playing the keyboard with that Part. You can

assign the Waveform to an Element of the Part in the Element Edit for the Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

(page 94) and the Key Edit for the Drum Part Edit (page 126).

Waveform

Indicates the selected Waveform.

Category (Waveform Main Category)

Sub Category (Waveform Sub Category)

Determines the Main category and the Sub category for the selected Waveform.

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Name (Waveform Name)

Determines the selected Waveform. Waveform names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the

parameter calls up the input character display.

Number of Keybank (Number of Key Bank)

Indicates the number of Key Banks in the selected Waveform.

Waveform Total Size

Indicates the total data size of the selected Waveform.

Keybank (Key Bank)

Indicates the selected Key Bank.

Size (Key Bank Size)

Indicates the data size of the selected Key Bank.

Channel (Key Bank Channel)

Indicates the Channel (Stereo or Mono) of the selected Key Bank.

Velocity Limit

Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which the selected Key Bank

will respond.

Settings: 1 – 127

Note Limit

Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for the selected Key Bank.

Settings: 1 – 127

Number of Key Banks Waveform Total Size

Note Limit and Velocity Limit for each Key Bank

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Volume

Determines the output volume of the selected Key Bank.

Settings: 0 – 255

Pan

Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Key Bank.

Settings: L63 – C – R63

Tune Coarse (Coarse Tune)

Determines the pitch of the selected Key Bank in semitones.

Settings: -64 – +63

Tune Fine (Fine Tune)

Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of the selected Key Bank.

Settings: -64 – +63

Delete Keybank (Delete Key Bank)

Deletes the selected Key Bank.

Add Keybank (Add Key Bank)

Adds new Key Bank to the selected Waveform.

From the Pitch EG display you can make all time and level settings for the Pitch EG, which determine how

the pitch of the sound changes over time for Oscillators. These can be used to control the change in pitch

from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment the sound stops.

The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.

Settings: Time: 0 – 127

Level: -128 – +127

Pitch EG

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Pitch EG]

Hold Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release

Time Hold Time Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time

Level Hold Level Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level Release Level

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

Reference

Time/Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity)

Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pitch EG

times. The Center Key (next parameter) is used as the basic pitch for this parameter.

Settings: -64 – +63

Positive values: High notes result in a high PEG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed.

Negative values: High notes result in a slow PEG transition speed while low notes result in a high speed.

0: The PEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note.

Center Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)

Determines how the PEG transition time (speed) responds to Velocity, or to the strength with which the key

is pressed. When the Center Key note is played, the PEG behaves according to its actual settings.

Settings: C-2 – G8

Time/Vel (PEG Time Velocity Sensitivity)

Segment (PEG Time Velocity Sensitivity Segment)

Determines the velocity sensitivity of the PEG’s Time parameters. Select the Segment, and then set its

“Time/Vel” parameter.

Settings: Time/Vel: -64 – +63

Positive values: High Velocities result in a fast PEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a slow speed.

Negative values: High Velocities result in a slow PEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a fast speed.

0: The PEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the Velocity.

Settings: Segment: Attack, Atk+Dcy (Attack+Decay), Decay, Atk+Rls (Attack+Release), All

Attack: Time/Vel parameter affects Attack Time.

Atk+Dcy: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Decay1 Time.

Decay: Time/Vel parameter affects Decay Time

Atk+Rls: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Release Time.

All: Time/Vel affects all PEG Time parameters.

PEG Depth

Determines the pitch range for Pitch EG.

Settings: -64 – +63

Depth/Vel (PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity)

Curve (PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity Curve)

Determines how the pitch range will be generated according to the Velocity (strength) with which you play

notes on the keyboard. The Curve parameter lets you select from five different preset velocity curves

(graphically indicated in the display) that determine how velocity affects the Pitch EG Depth. In the

illustrations below, the vertical axis indicates Pitch Change and the horizontal axis indicates Velocity.

Settings: Depth/Vel: -64 – +63

Positive values: High Velocities cause the pitch range to expand and low Velocities cause it to contract.

Negative values: High Velocities cause the pitch range to contract and low Velocities cause it to expand.

0: The pitch envelope does not change, regardless of the Velocity.

Settings: Curve: 0 – 4

NOTE For details on PEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

0 31 42

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

100

Reference

From the Type display you can make comprehensive settings for the Filter unit. The available parameters

differ depending on which Filter type is selected here.

Filter Type

Determines the Filter Type for the current Element. Basically, there are four different filters: LPF (Low Pass

Filter), HPF (High Pass Filter), BPF (Band Pass Filter) and BEF (Band Elimination Filter). For details on

settings, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Settings: LPF24D, LPF24A, LPF18, LPF18s, LPF12+HPF12, LPF6+HPF12, HPF24D, HPF12, BPF12D, BPFw, BPF6, BEF12,

BEF6, DualLPF, DualHPF, DualBPF, DualBEF, LPF12+BPF6, Thru

LPF

LPF24D: A dynamic -24 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter with a characteristic digital sound. Compared to the LPF24A type,

this filter can produce a more pronounced Resonance effect.

LPF24A: A digital dynamic Low-Pass Filter with characteristics similar to a 4-pole analog synthesizer filter.

LPF18: 3-pole -18 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter.

LPF18s: 3-pole -18 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter. This filter has a smoother cutoff slope than the LPF18 type.

Filter

Type

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Filter]  [Type]

Cutoff

Frequency

Gain

Frequency

Frequencies that are

“passed” by the filter

Gain

Cutoff

Frequency

Resonance

Frequency

Resonance

Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter

Gain

Frequency

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

101

Reference

HPF

LPF12+HPF12: A combination of a -12 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter and a -12 dB/oct High-Pass Filter connected in serial.

When this Filter Type is selected, HPF Cutoff and HPF Key Follow Sensitivity can be set

LPF6+HPF12: A combination of a -6 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter and a -12 dB/oct High-Pass Filter connected in serial.

When this Filter Type is selected, HPF Cutoff and HPF Key Follow Sensitivity can be set.

HPF24D: A dynamic -24 dB/oct High-Pass Filter with a characteristic digital sound. This filter can produce a

pronounced Resonance effect.

HPF12: -12 dB/oct dynamic High-Pass Filter.

BPF

BPF12D: The combination of a -12 dB/oct HPF and LPF with a characteristic digital sound.

BPFw: A -12 dB/oct BPF that combines HPF and LPF filters to allow wider bandwidth settings.

BPF6: The combination of a -6 dB/oct HPF and LPF.

Gain

Cutoff Frequency

Resonance

Frequency

Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter

Resonance

Gain

Frequency

Frequencies that are “passed”

by the filter

Center Frequency

Gain

Frequency

Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter

Gain

Frequency

Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter

Resonance

Gain

Frequency

Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter

Width

Gain

Frequency

Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter

Resonance

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

102

Reference

BEF

BEF12: -12 dB/oct Band-Eliminate Filter.

BEF6: -6 dB/oct Band-Eliminate Filter.

DualLPF: Two -12 dB/oct Low-Pass Filters connected in parallel. You can edit the distance between the two Cutoff

Frequencies.

DualHPF: Two -12 dB/oct High-Pass Filters connected in parallel.

DualBPF: Two -6 dB/oct Band-Pass Filters connected in parallel.

DualBEF: Two -6 dB/oct Band-Eliminate Filters connected in serial.

LPF12+BPF6: A combination of a -12 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter and a -6 dB/oct Band-Pass Filter connected in

parallel. You can edit the distance between the two Cutoff Frequencies.

Cutoff (Cutoff Frequency)

Determines the cutoff frequency for the Filter. This is used as the basic frequency for the selected Filter

Type.

Settings: 0 – 255

Cutoff/Vel (Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity)

Determines how the Cutoff Frequency responds to Velocity, or the strength with which you play notes.

Settings: -64 – +63

Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the Cutoff Frequency rises.

Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the Cutoff Frequency rises.

0: The Cutoff Frequency does not change, regardless of the Velocity.

Center Frequency

Gain

Frequency

Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter

Gain

Frequency

Distance

Lower Cutoff Frequency is set directly on the display

(and Higher Cutoff Frequency is automatically set)

Gain

Frequency

Distance

Lower Cutoff Frequency is set directly on the display

(and Higher Cutoff Frequency is automatically set)

Gain

Frequency

Distance

Lower Cutoff Frequency is set directly on the display

(and Higher Cutoff Frequency is automatically set)

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

103

Reference

Resonance

Width

This parameter’s function varies according to the selected Filter Type. If the selected filter is an LPF, HPF,

BPF (excluding BPFw), or BEF, this parameter is used to set the Resonance. For the BPFw, it is used to

adjust the frequency bandwidth. This parameter is used to set the amount of Resonance (harmonic

emphasis) applied to the signal at the cutoff frequency. This can be used in combination with the “Cutoff”

parameter to add further character to the sound. For the BPFw, this parameter is used to adjust the width

of the band of signal frequencies passed by the filter.

This parameter is not displayed depending on the selected Filter Types.

Settings: 0 – 127

Cutoff/Key (Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity)

Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Cutoff

Frequency (above). The Center Key (next parameter) is used as the basic Cutoff Frequency for this

parameter.

Settings: - 200% – +200%

Positive values: The Cutoff Frequency drops for lower notes and rises for higher notes.

Negative values: The Cutoff Frequency rises for lower notes and drops for higher notes.

Center Key (Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)

This indicates that the central note for “Cutoff/Key” above is C3. Keep in mind that this is for display

purposes only; the value cannot be changed.

Gain

Sets the Gain (the amount of boost applied to the signal sent to the Filter Unit).

In case of the Filter Type with “Distance” and “Res/Vel” parameters

Distance

Determines the distance between the Cutoff Frequencies for the Dual Filter types and the LPF12+BPF6

filter. This parameter is not displayed depending on the selected Filter Type.

Settings: -128 – +127

Res/Vel (Resonance Velocity Sensitivity)

Determines the degree to which Resonance responds to Velocity, or the strength with which you play

notes. This parameter is not displayed depending on the selected Filter Type.

Settings: -64 – +63

Positive values: The higher the Velocity, the greater the Resonance.

Negative values: The lower the Velocity, the greater the Resonance.

0: No change of the Resonance value.

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

104

Reference

In case of the Filter Type with “HPF Cutoff” and “HPF Cutoff/Key” parameters

HPF Cutoff (High Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency)

Determines the central frequency for the Key Follow parameter (below) of the HPF. This parameter is

available only when one of the filter types “LPF12+HPF12” or “LPF6+HPF12” is selected.

Settings: 0 – 255

HPF Cutoff/Key (High Pass Filter Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity)

Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or Octave Range) affect the Cutoff

Frequency of the HPF. This parameter is available only when one of the filter types “LPF12+HPF12” or

“LPF6+HPF12” is selected.

Settings: - 200% – +200%

Positive values: The Cutoff Frequency drops for lower notes and rises for higher notes.

Negative values: The Cutoff Frequency rises for lower notes and drops for higher notes.

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

105

Reference

From the Filter EG display you can make all time and level settings for the Filter EG, which determine how

the sound changes over time for Elements. These can be used to control the change the sound from the

moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment the sound stops.

The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.

Settings: Time: 0 – 127

Level: -128 – +127

Time/Key (FEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity)

Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Filter EG

Times. The basic speed of change for the FEG is at the note specified in Center Key (below).

Settings: -64 – +63

Positive values: High notes result in a high FEG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed.

Negative values: High notes result in a slow FEG transition speed while low notes result in a high speed.

0: The FEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note.

Center Key (FEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)

Determines the central note for the “Time/Key” parameter above.

Settings: C-2 – G8

Filter EG

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Filter]  [Filter EG]

Hold Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release

Time Hold Time Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time

Level Hold Level Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level Release Level

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

106

Reference

Time/Vel (FEG Time Velocity Sensitivity)

Segment (FEG Time Velocity Sensitivity Segment)

Determines how the FEG transition time (speed) responds to Velocity, or the strength with which the key is

pressed. Select the “Segment,” and then set its “Time/Vel” parameter.

Settings: Time/Vel: -64 – +63

Positive values: High Velocities result in a fast FEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a slow speed.

Negative values: High Velocities result in a slow FEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a fast speed.

0: The pitch transition speed does not change, regardless of the Velocity.

Settings: Segment: Attack, Atk+Dcy (Attack+Decay), Decay, Atk+Rls (Attack+Release), All

Attack: Time/Vel parameter affects Attack time.

Atk+Dcy: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Decay1 time.

Decay: Time/Vel parameter affects Decay Time.

Atk+Rls: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Release time.

All: Time/Vel affects all FEG Time parameters.

FEG Depth

Determines the Cutoff Frequency range for Filter EG.

Settings: -64 – +63

Depth/Vel (FEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity)

Curve (FEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity Curve)

Determines how the range of the Cutoff Frequency responds to Velocity (strength) with which you play

notes on the keyboard. The Curve parameter lets you select from five different preset velocity curves

(graphically indicated in the display) that determine how velocity affects the Filter EG Depth. In the

illustrations below, the vertical axis indicates Cutoff Frequency Change and the horizontal axis indicates

Velocity.

Settings: Depth/Vel: -64 – +63

Settings: Curve: 0 – 4

NOTE For details on FEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

0 31 42

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

107

Reference

From the Filter Scale display you can set parameters related to Filter Scale for Elements.

“Filter Scale” controls the Filter Cutoff Frequency according to the positions of the notes on the keyboard.

Break Point 1 – 4

Determines the four Break Points by specifying the respective note numbers.

Settings: C -2 – G8

NOTE Break Points 1 to 4 will be automatically be arranged in ascending order across the keyboard.

Cutoff Offset 1 – 4

Determines the offset value to the Cutoff Frequency at each Break Point.

Settings: -128 – +127

NOTE Regardless of the size of these Offsets, the minimum and maximum Cutoff limits (values of 0 and 127,

respectively) cannot be exceeded.

NOTE Any note played below the Break Point 1 note results in the Break Point 1 Level setting. Likewise, any note

played above the Break Point 4 note results in the Break Point 4 Level setting.

NOTE For information on setting examples for Filter Scaling, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Scale (Filter Scale)

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Filter]  [Scale]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

108

Reference

From the Level/Pan display you can make Level and Pan settings for each individual Element.

Level

Determines the output level of the Element.

Settings: 0 – 127

Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity)

Offset (Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset)

Curve (Level Velocity Sensitivity Curve)

Determines how the actual Velocity will be generated according to the Velocity (strength) with which you

play notes on the keyboard. The Offset parameter raises or lowers the level specified by the “Level/Vel.”

If the result is higher than 127, the velocity is set to 127. The Curve parameter lets you select from five

different preset velocity curves (graphically indicated in the display) that determine how velocity affects the

actual Velocity. In the illustrations below, the vertical axis indicates the actual resulting Velocity and the

horizontal axis indicates Velocity with which you play notes.

Settings: Level/Vel: -64 – +63

Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.

Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.

0: The output level does not change.

Settings: Offset: 0 – 127

A: Level Velocity Sensitivity = 0

B: Level Velocity Sensitivity = 32

C: Level Velocity Sensitivity = 64

X: Velocity with which you play a note

Y: Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator)

Amplitude

Level/Pan

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Amplitude]  [Level/Pan]

064

127

127 A

064

127

127 A

064

127

127 A

Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset = 0 Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset = 64 Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset = 96

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

109

Reference

Settings: Curve: 0 – 4

Pan (Element Pan)

Determines the stereo Pan position for the selected Element.

Settings: L63 – C (center) – R63

Alternate Pan

Determines the amount by which the sound is panned alternately left and right for each note you press.

The Pan setting (above) is used as the basic Pan position.

Settings: L64 – C – R63

Random Pan

Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Element is panned randomly left and right for

each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the Center Pan position.

Settings: 0 – 127

Scaling Pan

Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pan

position, left and right, of the selected Element. At note C3, the main Pan setting (above) is used for the

basic Pan position.

Settings: -64 – +0 – +63

Positive values: Moves the pan position to the left for lower notes and to the right for higher notes.

Negative values: Moves the pan position to the right for lower notes and to the left for higher notes.

Level/Key (Level Key Follow Sensitivity)

Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the volume of

the selected Element. A Center Key setting of C3 is used as the basic setting.

Settings: -64 – +0 – +63

Positive values: Lowers the output level for lower notes and raises it for higher notes.

Negative values: Raises the output level for lower notes and lowers it for higher notes.

Center Key (Level Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)

This indicates that the central note for “Level/Key” above is C3. Keep in mind that this is for display

purposes only; the value cannot be changed.

0 31 42

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

110

Reference

From the Amplitude EG display you can make all the time and level settings for the Amplitude EG, which

determine how the volume of the sound changes over time. Using the AEG, you can control the transition

in volume from the moment the sound starts is to the moment the sound stops.

The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.

Settings: Time: 0 – 127

Level: 0 – 127

Time/Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity)

Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Amplitude

EG Times. The Center Key parameter (below) is used as the basic amplitude for this parameter.

Settings: -64 – +63

Positive values: High notes result in a fast Amplitude EG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed.

Negative values: High notes result in a slow Amplitude EG transition speed while low notes result in a fast speed.

0: The Amplitude EG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note.

Center Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)

Determines the central note for the “Time/Key” parameter above. When the Center Key note is played, the

AEG behaves according to its actual settings.

Settings: C-2 – G8

Release Adj (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key Release Adjustment)

Determines the sensitivity of AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity to AEG Release. The lower the value, the

lower the sensitivity.

Settings: 0 – 127

127: Sets the AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity to the value of Decay 1 or Decay 2.

0: Produces no effect in the AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity.

Amp EG (Amplitude EG)

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Amplitude]  [Amp EG]

Initial Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release

Time – Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time

Level Initial Level Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level –

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

111

Reference

Time/Vel (AEG Time Velocity Sensitivity)

Segment (AEG Time Velocity Sensitivity Segment)

Determines how the AEG transition time (speed) responds to Velocity, or the strength with which the key is

pressed. Select the “Segment,” and then set its “Time/Vel” parameter.

Settings: Time/Vel: -64 – +63

Positive values: High Velocities result in a fast AEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a slow speed.

Negative values: High Velocities result in a slow AEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a fast speed.

0: The amplitude transition speed does not change, regardless of the Velocity.

Settings: Segment: Attack, Atk+Dcy (Attack+Decay), Decay, Atk+Rls (Attack+Release), All

Attack: Time/Vel parameter affects Attack Time.

Atk+Dcy: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Decay1 Time.

Decay: Time/Vel parameter affects Decay Time.

Atk+Rls: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Release Time.

All: Time/Vel affects all AEG Time parameters.

Half Damper (Half Damper Switch)

When the Half Damper Switch is set to on, you can produce a “half-pedal” effect just as on a real acoustic

piano by using the optional FC3 Foot Controller connected to the FOOT SWITCH [SUSTAIN] jack on the

rear panel.

Settings: off, on

Time (Half Damper Time)

Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released while holding down the Foot

Controller FC3 with the Half Damper Switch parameter turned on. This is not available when the Half

Damper Switch is set to off.

Settings: 0 – 127

NOTE For details on AEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

112

Reference

From the Amplitude Scale display you can make Amplitude Scale settings for each Element.

Amplitude Scale function controls the Amplitude output level according to the positions of the notes on the

keyboard.

Break Point 1 – 4

Determines the four Amplitude Scale Break Points by specifying their respective note numbers.

Settings: C -2 – G8

NOTE Break Points 1 to 4 will be automatically be arranged in ascending order across the keyboard.

Level Offset 1 – 4

Determines the offset value of the level of each Amplitude Scale Break Point.

Settings: -128 – +127

NOTE For details on setting examples of the Amplitude Scaling, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF

document.

Scale (Amplitude Scale)

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Amplitude]  [Scale]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

113

Reference

From the Element LFO display you can make LFO related setting for each Element.

The Low-Frequency Oscillator (LFO) unit of the Element generates a low frequency signal. The signal from

the LFO can be used to modulate the pitch, filter, and amplitude.

LFO Wave

Selects the LFO waveform that is used to vary the sound.

Settings: Saw, Triangle, Square

Speed (LFO Speed)

Adjusts the speed (frequency) of LFO variation. The larger the setting, the faster the speed.

Settings: 0 – 63

Key On Reset (LFO Key On Reset)

Determines whether or not the LFO is reset each time a note is played.

Settings: Off, On

Delay (LFO Delay Time)

Determines the delay time between the moment that a Note On message is received and the moment the

LFO comes into effect.

Settings: 0 – 127

Fade In (LFO Fade In Time)

Determines the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade in (after the “Delay” time has elapsed).

Settings: 0 – 127

Element LFO

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Element LFO]

Saw (Sawtooth wave) Triangle (Triangle wave) Square (Square wave)

Time

Key on

Off

Time

Key on

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

114

Reference

Pitch Mod (LFO Pitch Modulation Depth)

Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the pitch of the sound.

Settings: 0 – 127

Filter Mod (LFO Filter Modulation Depth)

Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the Filter Cutoff frequency.

Settings: 0 – 127

Amp Mod (LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth)

Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the amplitude or volume of

the sound.

Settings: 0 – 127

From the Element EQ display you can make EQ related settings for each Element.

EQ Type (Element EQ Type)

Determines the Equalizer Type.

Settings: 2-band, P.EQ (Parametric EQ), Boost6 (boost 6dB), Boost12 (boost 12dB), Boost18 (boost 18dB), Thru

2-band: This is a “shelving” equalizer, which combines separate high and low frequency bands.

P. E Q : The Parametric EQ is used to attenuate or boost signal levels (gain) around the Frequency.

Boost6, Boost12, Boost18: These can be used to boost the level of the entire signal by 6dB, 12dB and 18dB,

respectively

Thru: This setting bypasses the equalizers leaving the entire signal unaffected.

Element EQ

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Element selection  [Element EQ]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

115

Reference

When “EQ Type” is set to “2-band”

EQ Low Gain (Element EQ Low Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Low band.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

EQ Hi Gain (Element EQ High Gain)

Determines the level gain of the High band.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

EQ Low Freq (Element EQ Low Frequency)

Determines the frequency for the Low band.

Settings: 50.1Hz – 2.00kHz

EQ Hi Freq (Element EQ High Frequency)

Determines the frequency for the High band.

Settings: 139.7Hz – 12.9kHz

–

Low Freq

Settings: 50.1Hz – 2.00kHz

Gain

Frequency

High Freq

Settings: 139.7Hz – 12.9kHz

Low Gain

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

High Gain

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

116

Reference

When “EQ Type” is set to “P.EQ”

EQ Gain (Element EQ Gain)

Determines the level gain of the frequency set in “EQ Freq.”

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

EQ Freq (Element EQ Frequency)

Determines the frequency to be attenuated/boosted.

Settings: 139.7Hz – 12.9kHz

EQ Q (Element EQ Q)

This varies the signal level at the Frequency setting to create various frequency curve characteristics.

Settings: 0.7 – 10.3

NOTE For details on EQ structure, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

–

Frequency

Settings: 0.7 – 10.3

Gain

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

Freq

Settings: 139.7Hz – 12.9kHz

Gain

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

117

Reference

Element All (All Element)

From the Oscillator display you can set Oscillator-related parameters for the eight Elements.

SW (Element Switch)

Determines whether each Element is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

XA Control

Determines the functioning of the Expanded Articulation (XA) feature of an Element.

The XA feature is sophisticated tone generator system that allows you to more effectively recreate realistic

sound and natural performance techniques. It also provides other unique modes for random and alternate

sound changes as you play. For details on the XA feature, see the “Tone Generator Block” in the “Basic

Structure” on page 6.

Settings: Normal, Legato, Key Off, Cycle, Random, A.SW1 On (Assignable Switch 1 ON), A.SW2 On (Assignable Switch 2

ON), A.SW Off (Assignable Switch 1 OFF)

Normal: The Element sounds normally each time you play the note.

Legato: When the Mono/Poly parameter is set to Mono, this Element will be played in place of the one which is set to

“Normal” of the XA Control parameter when you play the keyboard in legato fashion (playing the next note of a

single-note line or melody before releasing the previous note).

Key Off: The Element will sound each time you release the note.

Cycle: Each Element sounds alternately according to its numerical order. In other words, playing the first note will

sound Element 1, the second note Element 2, and so on.

Random: Each Element will sound randomly each time you play the note.

A.SW1 On: When the [ASSIGN 1] button is turned On, the Element will sound.

A.SW2 On: When the [ASSIGN 2] button is turned On, the Element will sound.

A.SW Off: When both of the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are turned Off, the Element will sound.

Group (Element Group)

Determines the group for XA Control. All Elements that have the same type of XA features must have the

same group number. This setting does not apply when the XA Control parameters of all Elements are set to

Normal.

Settings: 1 – 8

Waveform (Waveform Name)

Indicates the Waveform Name for each Element.

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Osc (Oscillator)

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  [All]  [Osc]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (AWM2) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Pitch

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Element

Osc / Tune

Pitch EG

Filter

Type

Filter EG

Scale

Amplitude

Level / Pan

Amp EG

Scale

Element LFO

Element EQ

All Element

Osc

Balance

118

Reference

Velocity Limit

Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Element will

respond. Each Element will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first

specify the maximum value and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range

covers both “1 to 34” and “93 to 127.”

Settings: 1 – 127

Note Limit

Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Element. Each Element will only

sound for notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest

note, for example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.”

Settings: C -2 – G8

From the Balance display you can set parameters related to Level, Pitch, and Pan for the eight Elements.

SW (Element Switch)

Determines whether each Element is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

Coarse (Coarse Tune)

Determines the pitch of each Element in semitones.

Settings: -48 – +48

Fine (Fine Tune)

Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Element.

Settings: -64 – 63

Cutoff (Cutoff Frequency)

Determines the Cutoff Frequency for each Element.

Settings: 0 – 255

Pan (Element Pan)

Determines the stereo pan position for each Element.

Settings: L63 (far left) – C (center) – R63 (far right)

Level

Determines the level of each Element.

Settings: 0 – 127

Balance

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  [All]  [Balance]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Drum Part Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Control Assign

Receive SW

Key

Osc / Tune

Filter

Level / Pan

Element EQ

119

Reference

Drum Part Edit

Each Drum Part can consist of up to 73 Drum Keys, assigned to notes spread across the keyboard (C0 to

C6). There are two types of Drum Part Edit displays: Key Common Edit display, for editing the settings that

apply to all Drum keys; and Key Edit display, for editing individual keys. This section explains the

parameters for Key Common Edit and Key Edit.

Key Common Edit (Common)

Part Category Main (Part Main Category)

Part Category Sub (Part Sub Category)

Determines the Main category and the Sub category for the selected Part.

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Part Name

Determines the Part name of the selected Part. Part names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the

parameter calls up the input character display.

Volume (Part Volume)

Determines the output level of the selected Part.

Settings: 0 – 127

Pan

Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part.

Settings: L63 – C – R63

Dry Level

Determines the dry sound level (not effect applied) of the selected Part. This is available only when “Part

Output” is set to “MainL&R” or “Drum.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Part Settings

General

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 

[Part Settings]  [General]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Drum Part Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Control Assign

Receive SW

Key

Osc / Tune

Filter

Level / Pan

Element EQ

120

Reference

Var Send (Variation Send)

Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Variation effect. This is available only when “Part

Output” is set to “MainL&R” or “Drum.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Rev Send (Reverb Send)

Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part

Output” is set to “MainL&R” or “Drum.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Part Output (Part Output Select)

Determines which audio output is used for the selected Part.

Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB1&2…USB29&30, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1 – 30, Off, Drum

MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.

USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.

AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.

USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.

Drum: “Drum Key Out” is displayed to determine the specific output for each Drum Key.

Note Shift

Determines the pitch (key transpose) setting for each Part in semitones.

Settings: -24 – +0 – +24

Detune

Determines the pitch settings of the selected Part in 0.1 Hz increments.

Settings: -12.8Hz – +0.0Hz – +12.7Hz

Pitch Bend / (Pitch Bend Range Upper/Lower)

Determines the maximum Pitch Bend Range in semitones.

Settings: -48 – +0 – +24

Arp Play Only (Arpeggio Play Only)

Determines whether or not the current Part plays only the note events of the Arpeggio playback. When this

parameter is set to on, only the note events of the Arpeggio playback affect the tone generator block.

Settings: Off, On

Element Pan (Element Pan Switch)

Determines whether the individual pan settings for each Key Part (made via [EDIT]  Part selection 

Drum Key selection  [Level/Pan]  “Pan”) are applied or not. When this is set to “off,” the pan position

for the each Key is set to center in the Part.

Settings: Off, On

Velocity Limit

Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Part will respond.

Settings: 1 – 127

Note Limit

Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Part.

Settings: C -2 – G8

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Drum Part Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Control Assign

Receive SW

Key

Osc / Tune

Filter

Level / Pan

Element EQ

121

Reference

Velocity Depth (Velocity Sensitivity Depth)

Determines the degree to which the resulting volume of the tone generator responds to your playing

strength. The higher the value, the more the volume changes in response to your playing strength (as

shown below).

Settings: 0 – 127

Velocity Offset (Velocity Sensitivity Offset)

Determines the amount by which played velocities are adjusted for the actual resulting velocity effect. This

lets you raise or lower all velocities based on this setting value—allowing you to automatically compensate

for playing too strongly or too softly.

Settings: 0 – 127

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 63).

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 65).

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

127

0127

When Offset (below) is set to 64:

Actual resulting

velocity

(affecting the

tone generator)

Velocity with which you play a note

Depth=127 Depth=64

Depth=32

Depth=0

127

012764 127

127

12764

127

Velocity with which you play a note Velocity with which you play a noteVelocity with which you play a note

Actual

resulting

velocity

(affecting

the tone

generator)

Actual

resulting

velocity

(affecting

the tone

generator)

Actual

resulting

velocity

(affecting

the tone

generator)

When Depth (above) = 64

and Offset = 64

When Depth (above) = 64

and Offset = 96

When Depth (above) = 64

and Offset = 32

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Drum Part Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Control Assign

Receive SW

Key

Osc / Tune

Filter

Level / Pan

Element EQ

122

Reference

Drum Key Connection Switch

Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Drum Key, and which is

bypassed (Thru).

When the “Keyboard Select” is on, you can select Keys by playing the notes on the keyboard.

Settings: Thru, InsA (Insertion Effect A), InsB (Insertion Effect B)

Insertion FX Switch

Determines whether or not Insertion Effect A / Insertion Effect B is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

Category (Effect Category)

Type (Effect Type)

Determines the category and type for the selected effect.

Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the

description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Preset

Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific

applications and situations.

Settings: For a list of all Preset Performances, see the Data List PDF document.

Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part)

Determine the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator. This is not available depending on the selected

Effect Type. For details on the Side Chain/Modulator, see the Routing display (page 67) of the Normal Part

(AWM2).

Settings: Part 1 – 16, A/D, Master, Off

Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type)

Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B.

Settings: Parallel, Ins AB, Ins BA

Effect

Routing

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Effect] 

[Routing]

Drum Key Connection Switch Insertion FX Switch

Insertion FX Switch

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Drum Part Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Control Assign

Receive SW

Key

Osc / Tune

Filter

Level / Pan

Element EQ

123

Reference

RevSend (Reverb Send)

VarSend (Variation Send)

Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the

Reverb/Variation effect. This is active only when the Part Output/Drum Key Output is set to “MainL&R.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Part Output (Part Output Select)

Determines the specific output for the audio signal.

Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB1&2…USB29&30, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1 – 30, Off, Drum

MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.

USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.

AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.

USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.

Drum: “Drum Key Out” is displayed to determine the specific output for each Drum Key.

Envelope Follower

Calls up the Envelope Follower Setting display.

Refer to the Routing display (page 68) for Normal Parts (AWM2).

InsRev (Insertion Reverb Send)

InsVar (Insertion Variation Send)

Determines the Send level for the entire Drum Part (all keys), sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Reverb/

Variation effect.

This is active only when the Drum Key Connection Switch is set to “InsA” or “InsB” and the Part Output/

Drum Key Output is set to “MainL&R.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Drum Part Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Control Assign

Receive SW

Key

Osc / Tune

Filter

Level / Pan

Element EQ

124

Reference

KeyRev (Drum Key Reverb Send)

KeyVar (Drum Key Variation Send)

Determines the Send level for each Drum Key, sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Reverb/Variation effect.

This is active only when the Drum Key Connection Switch is set to “Thru” and the Part Output/Drum Key

Output is set to “MainL&R.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Drum Key Out (Drum Key Output Select)

Determines the specific output for the individual Drum Key.

This is displayed only when the Part Output is set to “Drum.”

Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB1&2…USB29&30, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1 – 30

MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.

USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.

AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.

USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

NOTE When the Drum Key Connection Switch is set to “InsA” or “InsB,” this parameter is fixed to “MainL&R.”

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Drum Part Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Control Assign

Receive SW

Key

Osc / Tune

Filter

Level / Pan

Element EQ

125

Reference

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 69).

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 70).

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 73).

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 76).

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 77), except for the

additional parameter below.

Fixed SD/BD

When this parameter is set to On, C1 will be used as the note of the Bass Drum and D1 will be used as the

note of the Snare Drum in Arpeggio playback.

Settings: Off, On

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 78).

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 81).

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 89), except for the

different setting values in the Destination parameter. For the setting value for “Destination,” see the “Control

List” in the Data List PDF document.

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 92).

Ins A (Insertion Effect A)

Ins B (Insertion Effect B)

EQ (Part Equalizer)

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer)

Common

Lane

Mod/Control (Modulation/Control)

Control Assign

Receive SW (Receive Switch)

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Drum Part Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Control Assign

Receive SW

Key

Osc / Tune

Filter

Level / Pan

Element EQ

126

Reference

Key Edit (Key)

From the Oscillator/Tune display you can set Oscillator-related parameters for each Key of the Drum Part.

Bank (Waveform Bank)

Number (Waveform Number)

Category (Waveform Category)

Sub Category (Waveform Sub Category)

Name (Waveform Name)

Indicates the information of the waveform used for the selected Drum Key. “Bank” indicates which

waveform location (Preset, User and Library) is assigned to the Key.

Settings: Refer to the Data List PDF document.

Drum Key Switch

Determines whether the currently selected Drum Key is used or not.

Settings: Off, On

Assign Mode (Key Assign Mode)

Determines the playing method when the same notes are received continuously, and without

corresponding note off messages.

Settings: Single, Multi

Single: Double or repeated playback of the same note is not possible. The first note will be stopped, then the next

note will be sounded.

Multi: All notes are sounded simultaneously. This allows playback of the same note when it is played multiple times

in succession (especially for tambourine and cymbal sounds that you would want to ring out to their full decay).

Connect (Drum Key Connection Switch)

Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Drum Key. The Insertion

Effect is bypassed if “Thru” is selected. This parameter is same as the “Connect” parameter in the

“Routing” display of Effect settings in Key Common Edit. Making a setting here automatically changes the

setting of that parameter as well.

Settings: Thru, InsA (Insertion Effect A), InsB (Insertion Effect B)

Osc/Tune (Oscillator/Tune)

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Key selection  [Osc/Tune]

Drum Key Switch

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Drum Part Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Control Assign

Receive SW

Key

Osc / Tune

Filter

Level / Pan

Element EQ

127

Reference

New Waveform

Loads Audio data stored in the USB flash memory as “Waveform.” For details on loading, see “Load”

(page 174).

After the Waveform is loaded, the Edit Waveform parameter will be available. For details on “Edit

Waveform,” see page 96.

Coarse (Coarse Tune)

Determines the pitch of each Drum Key Wave in semitones.

Settings: -48 – +48

Fine (Fine Tune)

Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Drum Key Wave.

Settings: -64 – 63

Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity)

Determines how the pitch of the selected Drum key responds to velocity.

Settings: -64 – 63

Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises.

Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls.

0: No change in pitch.

Rcv Note Off (Receive Note Off)

Select whether MIDI Note Off messages are received by each Drum Key.

Settings: off, on

Group (Alternate Group)

Set the Alternate Group to which the key is assigned. The Parts to which the same number is assigned

here cannot sound simultaneously. This setting helps to reproduce the sounds of a real drum kit, in which

some drum sounds cannot physically be played simultaneously, such as open and closed hi-hats.

Settings: off, 1 – 127

KeyRev (Drum Key Reverb Send)

KeyVar (Drum Key Variation Send)

Determines the level of the Drum key sound (the bypassed signal) that is sent to Reverb/Variation effect.

This is not available depending on the setting of the Drum Key Connection Switch.

Settings: 0 – 127

Drum Key Out (Drum Key Output Select)

Determines the specific output for the individual Drum Key.

This is not available depending on the settings of Drum Key Connection Switch or Part Output.

Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB1&2…USB29&30, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1 – 30

MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.

USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.

AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.

USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

Keyboard Select (Keyboard Select Switch)

Determines whether or not the Keyboard Select setting is active or not. When this is set to on, you can

select Drum Keys by playing the notes on the keyboard.

Settings: Off, On

Drum Key

Indicates the selected Drum key.

Settings: C0 – C6

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Drum Part Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Control Assign

Receive SW

Key

Osc / Tune

Filter

Level / Pan

Element EQ

128

Reference

From the Filter display you can apply filter settings to the Drum Part. These let you apply a low pass filter

and high pass filter to each individual Drum key.

Cutoff (Low Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency)

Use this parameter to set the cutoff frequency for the low-pass filter.

Settings: 0 – 255

Cutoff/Vel (Low Pass Filter Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity)

Set the velocity sensitivity of the Low Pass Filter Cutoff frequency. Positive settings will cause the Cutoff

Frequency to rise the harder you play the keyboard. A negative setting will have the opposite effect.

Settings: -64 – +63

Resonance (Low Pass Filter Resonance)

Determines the amount of Resonance (harmonic emphasis) applied to the signal at the Cutoff Frequency.

Settings: 0 – 127

HPF Cutoff (High Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency)

Determines the Cutoff frequency of the High Pass Filter.

Settings: 0 – 255

Filter

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Key selection  [Filter]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Drum Part Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Control Assign

Receive SW

Key

Osc / Tune

Filter

Level / Pan

Element EQ

129

Reference

From the Level/Pan display you can make Level and Pan settings for each Drum Key.

The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.

Settings: Time: 0 – 127, Hold (only for Decay2)

Level: 0 – 127

Level

Determines the output level of the Drum Key. This lets you make detailed balance adjustments among the

various sounds of the Drum Key.

Settings: 0 – 127

Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity)

Determines how the output level of the Drum Key responds to Velocity.

Settings: -64 – +63

Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.

Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.

0: The output level does not change.

Pan

Sets the pan position (stereo position) of each Drum Key. This will also be used as the basic Pan position

for the Alternate and Random settings.

Settings: L63 (far left) – C (center) – R63 (far right)

Level/Pan

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Key selection  [Level/Pan]

Attack Decay1 Decay2

Time Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time

Level –Decay1 Level –

Decay2 Time = HoldDecay2 Time = 0 – 126

Level Level

Attack level Attack level

Decay1 level Decay1 level

Key on Key on

Attach

time

Attach

time

Decay1

time

Decay2

time

Decay1

time

Decay2

time

TimeTime

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Drum Part Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Control Assign

Receive SW

Key

Osc / Tune

Filter

Level / Pan

Element EQ

130

Reference

Alternate Pan

Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Drum key is panned alternately left and right

for each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the basic Pan position.

Settings: L64 – C – R63

Random Pan

Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Drum Key is panned randomly left and right for

each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the Center Pan position.

Settings: 0 – 127

Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 114).

Element EQ

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Algorithm

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Pitch / Filter

Pitch

PEG/Scale

Filter Type

Filter EG

Filter Scale

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

2nd LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Operator

Form / Freq

Level

131

Reference

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

A Normal Part (FM-X) can consist of up to eight Operators. There are two types of Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

displays: Operator Common Edit display, for editing settings common to all eight Operators; and Operator

Edit display, for editing individual Operators.

Operator Common Edit (Common)

From the General display you can set various parameters such as Part Name, Volume, and Pan.

Most parameters are the same as parameters on the Element Common Edit display for Normal Parts

(AWM2) (page 58) except the following additional parameters as bellows.

Random Pan

Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Operator is panned randomly left and right for

each note you press. The Pan setting is used as the Center Pan position.

Settings: 0 – 127

Alternate Pan

Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Operator is panned alternately left and right for

each note you press. The Pan setting is used as the basic Pan position.

Settings: L64 – C – R63

Scaling Pan

Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pan

position, left and right, of the selected Operator. At note C3, the main Pan setting is used for the basic Pan

position. Positive settings will cause the Pan position to be set left when you play in the lower range on the

keyboard and to be set right when you play in the higher range on the keyboard. A negative setting will

have the opposite effect.

Settings: -64 – +0 – +63

Part Settings

General

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 

[Part Settings]  [General]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Algorithm

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Pitch / Filter

Pitch

PEG/Scale

Filter Type

Filter EG

Filter Scale

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

2nd LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Operator

Form / Freq

Level

132

Reference

KeyOnDly Sync (Key On Delay Tempo Sync Switch)

Determines whether or not “Key On Delay Time Length” is synchronized to the tempo.

Settings: Off, On

Delay Length (Key On Delay Time Length)

Determines the time (or elapsed delay) between the moment you press a note on the keyboard and the

point at which the sound is actually played. You can set different delay times for each Operator. This is not

available when “KeyOnDly Sync” is set to on.

Settings: 0 – 127

Delay Length (Key On Delay Note Length)

Determines the timing of “Key On Delay” when “KeyOnDly Sync” is set to on.

Settings: 1/16, 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8, 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot.

(dotted eighth notes), 1/4, 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2, Whole Tri. (whole-note

triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 5

(quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the

beat), 1/4 x 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter

notes to the beat)

From the Algorithm display you can specify the Algorithm, which determines the arrangement of the

Operators and how the FM sound is generated.

Algorithm (Algorithm Number)

Changes Algorithms.

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Feedback (Feedback Level)

Waveforms can be changed by feeding some of the signal generated by an operator back through that

operator. This allows you to set the feedback level.

Settings: 0 – 7

Algorithm

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 

[Part Settings]  [Algorithm]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Algorithm

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Pitch / Filter

Pitch

PEG/Scale

Filter Type

Filter EG

Filter Scale

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

2nd LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Operator

Form / Freq

Level

133

Reference

Algorithm Search

Calls up the Algorithm Search display. From this display you can search for desired Algorithms by filtering

the number of Carriers, or the maximum length of the serial connection of Operators.

Chain

Filters the Algorithms by the maximum length of serial connection of Operators.

Settings: 1 – 8

Carrier

Filters the Algorithms by the number of Carriers.

Settings: 1 – 8

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 63).

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 65).

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Algorithm list

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Algorithm

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Pitch / Filter

Pitch

PEG/Scale

Filter Type

Filter EG

Filter Scale

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

2nd LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Operator

Form / Freq

Level

134

Reference

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 60), except that the

Legato Slope parameter is not available.

From the Pitch EG/Scale display you can make all time and level settings for the Pitch EG, which determine

how the pitch of the sound changes over time, and the Scale for Parts.

The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.

Settings: Time: 0 – 99

Level: -50 – +50

PEG Depth

Determines the pitch range for Pitch EG.

Settings: 8 oct, 2 oct, 1 oct, 0.5 oct

Depth/Vel (PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity)

Determines how the pitch range will be generated according to the Velocity (strength) with which you play

notes on the keyboard.

Settings: 0 – 7

Time/Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity)

Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pitch EG

Times. The Center Key (C3) is used as the basic pitch for this parameter.

Settings: 0 – 7

Positive values: High notes result in a high PEG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed.

0: The PEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note.

Pitch/Filter

Pitch

PEG/Scale (Pitch EG/Scale)

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 

[Pitch/Filter]  [PEG/Scale]

Initial Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release

Time – Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time

Level Hold Level Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level Release Level

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Algorithm

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Pitch / Filter

Pitch

PEG/Scale

Filter Type

Filter EG

Filter Scale

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

2nd LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Operator

Form / Freq

Level

135

Reference

Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity)

Determines the sensitivity of the Key Follow effect (the pitch interval of adjacent notes), assuming the pitch

of the Center Key (below) as standard.

Settings: -200% – +0% – +200%

+100% (the normal setting): Adjacent notes are pitched one semitone apart.

0%: All notes have the same pitch as the Center Key.

Negative values: The settings are reversed.

Center Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)

Determines the central note or pitch for the Key Follow effect on pitch.

Settings: C -2 – G8

Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity)

Determines how the pitch responds to velocity.

Settings: -64 – 63

Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises.

Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls.

0: No change in pitch.

Random Pitch (Random Pitch Depth)

Allows you to randomly vary the pitch for each note played.

Settings: 0 – 127

NOTE For details on PEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 100).

Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 105).

Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 107).

Filter Type

Filter EG

Filter Scale

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Algorithm

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Pitch / Filter

Pitch

PEG/Scale

Filter Type

Filter EG

Filter Scale

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

2nd LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Operator

Form / Freq

Level

136

Reference

From the Routing display you can determine the Effect connections for Parts.

Insertion FX Switch

Determines whether the Insertion Effect A/B is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

Category (Effect Category)

Type (Effect Type)

Determines the category and type for the selected Effect.

Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the

description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Preset

Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific

applications and situations.

Settings: For a list of all Preset Effects, see the Data List PDF document.

Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part)

Determines the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator. This is not active depending on Effect Types.

For details on the Side Chain/Modulator, see the Routing display (page 67) of the Normal Part (AWM2).

Settings: Part 1 – 16, A/D, Master, Off

Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type)

Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram

in the display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed. For details, see the section “Effect

connection” (page 19) of the “Basic Structure.”

Settings: Parallel, Ins AB, Ins BA

Rev Send (Reverb Send)

Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Reverb effect.

Settings: 0 – 127

Effect

Routing

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Effect] 

[Routing]

Insertion FX Switch

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Algorithm

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Pitch / Filter

Pitch

PEG/Scale

Filter Type

Filter EG

Filter Scale

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

2nd LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Operator

Form / Freq

Level

137

Reference

Var Send (Variation Send)

Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Variation effect.

Settings: 0 – 127

Part Output (Part Output Select)

Determines the specific audio output.

Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB Stereo, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1 – 30, Off

MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.

USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.

AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.

USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 69).

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 70).

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 73).

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 76).

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 77).

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 78).

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 81).

Ins A (Insertion Effect A)

Ins B (Insertion Effect B)

EQ (Part Equalizer)

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer)

Common

Lane

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Algorithm

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Pitch / Filter

Pitch

PEG/Scale

Filter Type

Filter EG

Filter Scale

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

2nd LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Operator

Form / Freq

Level

138

Reference

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 85), except that the

setting values of the Destination parameter differ and that “Element Phase Offset (LFO Element Phase

Offset)” is not available. For details on the setting values, see the Data List PDF document.

LFO Wave (2nd LFO Waveform)

Selects the 2nd LFO waveform.

Settings: Triangle, Saw Down, Saw Up, Square, Sine, S/H

NOTE When “Sine” is selected, two waves will be shown in the diagram on the display because of the phase shift of

the Amplitude Modulation wave.

Key On Reset (2nd LFO Key On Reset)

Determines whether or not the 2nd LFO is reset each time a note is pressed.

Settings: Off, On

Speed (2nd LFO Speed)

Adjusts the speed (frequency) of the 2nd LFO variation.

Settings: 0 – 99

Phase (2nd LFO Phase)

Determines the starting phase point for the 2nd LFO Wave when it is reset.

Settings: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°

Delay (2nd LFO Delay Time)

Determines the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the 2nd

LFO comes into effect.

Settings: 0 – 99

Mod/Control (Modulation/Control)

Part LFO

2nd LFO

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 

[Mod/Control]  [2nd LFO]

Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio

(2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio)

Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio

(2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio)

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Algorithm

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Pitch / Filter

Pitch

PEG/Scale

Filter Type

Filter EG

Filter Scale

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

2nd LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Operator

Form / Freq

Level

139

Reference

Pitch Modulation (2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Depth)

Determines the amount (depth) by which the 2nd LFO waveform varies (modulates) the pitch of the sound.

Settings: 0 – 99

Amplitude Modulation (2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth)

Determines the amount (depth) by which the 2nd LFO waveform varies (modulates) the amplitude or

volume of the sound.

Settings: 0 – 99

Filter Modulation (2nd LFO Filter Modulation Depth)

Determines the amount (depth) by which the 2nd LFO waveform varies (modulates) the Filter Cutoff

frequency.

Settings: 0 – 99

Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio

(2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio)

Adjusts the amount (depth) which is determined in the “2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Depth” for each

Operator.

Settings: 0 – 7

Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio

(2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio)

Adjusts the amount (depth) which is determined in the “2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth” for each

Operator.

Settings: 0 – 7

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 89), except for the

different setting values in the Destination parameter. For details on the setting value, see the Data List PDF

document.

Also the following parameter is shown on this display.

Operator SW (Operator Switch)

Selects whether the controller will affect each individual Operator (On) or not (Off). This is available only

when an Operator-related parameter is set in “Destination.”

Settings: Off, On

Control Assign

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON] 

[Mod/Control]  [Control Assign]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Algorithm

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Pitch / Filter

Pitch

PEG/Scale

Filter Type

Filter EG

Filter Scale

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

2nd LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Operator

Form / Freq

Level

140

Reference

Operator Rate

Determines the sensitivity of the Controller in changing the parameter set in “Destination” for each

Operator.

This is available only when “Destination” is set to “OP Freq” or “OP AEG Offset.”

Settings: Off, On

SW/Rate (Operator Switch/Operator Rate Switch)

Switches displays between “Operator Switch” and “Operator Rate.”

This is available only when “Destination” is set to “OP Freq” or “OP AEG Offset.”

Settings: Off, On

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 92).

Receive SW (Receive Switch)

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Algorithm

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Pitch / Filter

Pitch

PEG/Scale

Filter Type

Filter EG

Filter Scale

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

2nd LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Operator

Form / Freq

Level

141

Reference

Operator Edit (Operator)

From the Form/Frequency display you can make all the waveform and frequency settings for Operators.

The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.

Settings: Time: 0 – 99

Level: -50 – +50

Spectral (Spectral Form)

Determines the “spectral form” of the selected Operator.

Settings: Sine, All 1, All 2, Odd 1, Odd 2, Res 1, Res 2

Skirt (Spectral Skirt)

Determines the spread of the “skirt” at the bottom of the formant harmonics curve. Higher values produce

a wider skirt and smaller values produce a narrower skirt. This is not available when “Spectral” is set to

“Sine.”

Settings: 0 – 7

Resonance (Spectral Resonance)

Determines the degree to which velocity affects the Resonance of the Spectral Form. The center frequency

moves to higher frequencies, letting you create a special resonance in the sound. This is active only when

“Spectral” is set to “Res 1” or “Res 2.”

Settings: 0 – 99

Form/Freq (Form/Frequency)

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Operator selection  [Form/Freq]

Initial Attack Decay

Time – Attack Time Decay Time

Level Initial Level Attack Level –

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Algorithm

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Pitch / Filter

Pitch

PEG/Scale

Filter Type

Filter EG

Filter Scale

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

2nd LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Operator

Form / Freq

Level

142

Reference

Basic waveforms used as Operators contain harmonics, with the exception of “Sine.” A sine wave contains

its fundamental frequency with no additional harmonics. Therefore, when “Form” is set to any waveform

other than “Sine”, you can adjust harmonics and the peak of each formant, depending on the Waveform

Type by determining the related parameters. Below are the basic waveforms and the characteristic

parameters.

The larger the “Skirt” value, the more harmonics the wave contains.

The larger “Resonance” value, the higher frequency the center frequency is moved.

• Resonance=0: The Center frequency is the basic wave

• Resonance=99: The Center frequency is the 100th harmonic

Key On Reset (Oscillator Key On Reset)

Determines whether or not the oscillation of the Operator is reset each time a note is pressed.

Settings: Off, On

Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity)

Determines how the pitch of the selected Operator responds to velocity. This is available only when “Freq

Mode” is set to “Fixed.”

Settings: -7 – +7

Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises.

Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls.

0: No change in pitch.

Freq Mode (Oscillator Frequency Mode)

Determines the settings for the Output Pitch of the Operator.

Settings: Ratio, Fixed

Ratio: Determines the Output Pitch by detecting the note you play on the keyboard.

Fixed: Specifies the Pitch by setting “Coarse” and “Fine.”

Level

Skirt

Center Frequency

(F.Coarse & Freq Fine)

Center Frequency

(F.Coarse & Freq Fine)

Center Frequency

(F.Coarse & Freq Fine)

Center Frequency

(F.Coarse & Freq Fine)

Frequency

(Hz)

Frequency

(Hz)

Frequency

(Hz)

Frequency

(Hz)

Level

Skirt

Center Frequency

(F.Coarse & Freq Fine)

Frequency

(Hz)

Resonance of

Center Frequency Level

Skirt

Center Frequency

(F.Coarse & Freq Fine)

Frequency

(Hz)

Resonance of

Center Frequency

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Algorithm

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Pitch / Filter

Pitch

PEG/Scale

Filter Type

Filter EG

Filter Scale

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

2nd LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Operator

Form / Freq

Level

143

Reference

Coarse (Coarse Tune)

Determines the pitch of each Operator.

Settings: When “Freq Mode” is set to “Ratio”: 0 – 31

When “Freq Mode” is set to “Fixed”: 0 – 21

Fine (Fine Tune)

Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Operator.

Settings: When “Freq Mode” is set to “Ratio”: 0 – 99

When “Freq Mode” is set to “Fixed”: 0 – 127

Detune

Sets the Output Pitch of the Operator slightly higher or lower.

Even if the same parameter value is set for both “Coarse Tune” and “Fine Tune,” the Detune lets you

slightly raise or lower the pitch of each Operator, allowing you to add an extra dimension to the sound and

enhance the spatial characteristics.

Settings: -15 – +15

Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity)

Determines the sensitivity of the Key Follow effect (the degree depending on their position or octave

range). This is available only when “Freq Mode” is set to “Fixed.”

Settings: 0 – 99

0: All notes are the same pitch specified by Coarse and Fine.

99: Adjacent notes are pitched one semitone apart.

From the Level display you can make all the volume settings for the Operator.

The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.

Settings: Time: 0 – 99

Level: 0 – 99

Level

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection  Operator selection  [Level]

Hold Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release

Time Hold Time Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time

Level –Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level Release (Hold) Level

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Normal Part (FM-X) Edit

Common

Part Settings

General

Algorithm

Zone Settings

Zone Transmit

Pitch / Filter

Pitch

PEG/Scale

Filter Type

Filter EG

Filter Scale

Effect

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Arpeggio

Common

Individual

Advanced

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Mod / Control

Part LFO

2nd LFO

Control Assign

Receive SW

Operator

Form / Freq

Level

144

Reference

Level (Operator Level)

Determines the output level of the Operator.

Settings: 0 – 99

Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity)

Determines how the output level of the Operator responds to Velocity.

Settings: -7 – +7

Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.

Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.

0: The output level does not change.

Time/Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity)

Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Amplitude

EG Times.

Settings: 0 – 7

Positive values: High notes result in a fast Amplitude EG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed.

0: The Amplitude EG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note.

Break Point

Determines the Amplitude Scale Break Points by specifying their respective note numbers.

Settings: A-1 – C8

Curve Lo (Low Curve)

Curve Hi (High Curve)

Determines the curve for Amplitude scaling.

Settings: -Linear, -Exp, +Exp, +Linear

Lvl/Key Lo (Low Depth)

Lvl/Key Hi (High Depth)

Determines the curve degree of the curve (above).

Settings: 0 – 99

The keyboard is divided in two at the break point.

The high-pitch side at the right is set by using the R Depth and the R Curve; the low-pitch side at the left is

set by using the L Depth and the L Curve as described below.

The Output level of the Key set as the Break Point depends on the Operator Level setting. For the Keys in

the left side of the Break Point, the Output level is adjusted based on the curve which is determined by the

Low Curve and Low Depth. For the Keys in the right side of the Break Point, the Output level is adjusted

based on the curve which is determined by the High Curve and High Depth. The Output level changes in

an exponential fashion from the Break Point on the Exp type curve and the Output level changes in a linear

fashion from the Break Point in the Linear type curve. In either case, the farther away from the Break Point

the key is, the greater the Output level changes for the key.

+exp +exp+linear +linear

-exp-linear

-exp -linear

Output Level

Low Depth

Low Curve High Curve

High Depth

Key

Break Point Output Level

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Common/Audio Edit

Common/Audio

General

Audio In

Mixing

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Control

Control Assign

Control Number

Effect

Routing

Variation

Reverb

Master FX

Master EQ

145

Reference

Common/Audio Edit (Common/Audio)

A Performance consists up to 16 Parts. You can set the parameters related to the entire Performance and

the Audio Parts in the Common/Audio Edit display.

From the General display you can set various parameters for the Performance.

Performance Name

Determines the selected Performance name. Performance names can contain up to 20 characters.

Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.

Motion Control Flag

Determines whether or not to add the “Motion Control” attribute to the selected Performance. When this is

set to on, the “MC” icon is displayed in the Performance Play display (page 26). The Performance can be

filtered as “MC” in the Performance Category Search display (page 161).

Settings: Off, On

Tg Flag (Tone Generator Flag)

Determines the attribute by the Tone Generator of the selected Performance. The name icon of the

selected Tone Generator is displayed in the Performance Play display (page 26). The Performance can be

filtered as “AWM2/FM/FM-X+AWM2” in the Performance Category Search display (page 161).

Settings: AWM2, FM-X, AWM2+FM-X

Volume (Performance Volume)

Determines the output volume of the selected Performance.

Settings: 0 – 127

Pan

Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Performance.

Settings: L63 – C – R63

Var Return (Variation Return)

Determines the return level of the Variation effect.

Settings: 0 – 127

General

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [General]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Common/Audio Edit

Common/Audio

General

Audio In

Mixing

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Control

Control Assign

Control Number

Effect

Routing

Variation

Reverb

Master FX

Master EQ

146

Reference

Rev Return (Reverb Return)

Determines the return level of the Reverb effect.

Settings: 0 – 127

Audition Phrase Number

Determines the Audition Phrase Number. You can hear a sample of the selected Performance sounds that

is called “Audition phrase.” The best matching Audition Phrase is assigned to each Preset Performance in

advance.

Settings: 1 – 850

Note Shift (Audition Phrase Note Shift)

Determines the pitch (key transpose) setting for the Audition Phrase in semitones.

Settings: -24semi – +24semi

Velocity Shift (Audition Phrase Velocity Shift)

Determines the velocity of the Audition Phrase.

Settings: -63 – +63

Portamento Master SW (Portamento Master Switch)

Determines whether Portamento is applied to the Part or not when the “Portamento Part SW” is set to on for

the Part.

Settings: Off, On

Portamento Time

Determines the pitch transition time or rate when Portamento is applied.

Settings: -64 – +63

RB Mode (Ribbon Controller Mode)

Determines how the Ribbon Controller responds when released.

Settings: Hold, Reset

Hold: When set to Hold, releasing your finger from the Ribbon Controller maintains the value at the last point of

contact.

Reset: When set to Reset, releasing your finger from the Ribbon Controller automatically returns the value to the

center.

Assign 1 Mode/Assign 2 Mode (Assignable Switch 1 Mode/Assignable Switch 2 Mode)

Determines whether the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons functions as a latch type or momentary type.

Settings: Latch, Momentary

Latch: When set to “Latch,” pressing the button alternates the status between on and off.

Momentary: When set to “Momentary,” pressing/holding the button turns on and releasing the button turns off.

MS Hold Mode (Motion Sequencer Hold Mode)

Determines how the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] button responds when pressed.

Settings: Latch, Momentary

Latch: When set to “Latch,” pressing the button alternates the status between on and off.

Momentary: When set to “Momentary,” pressing/holding the button turns on and releasing the button turns off.

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Common/Audio Edit

Common/Audio

General

Audio In

Mixing

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Control

Control Assign

Control Number

Effect

Routing

Variation

Reverb

Master FX

Master EQ

147

Reference

From the Mixing display you can adjust the volume settings of the Audio Part (the input signal from the A/D

INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks) and the Digital Part (the input signal from the [USB TO HOST] terminal*).

* Only the sound of the Port which, among all Device Ports, is set to “Digital L/R.”

A/D In Input Mode/Digital In Input Mode (A/D Part Input Mode/Digital Part Input Mode)

Determines the signal configuration for the A/D Part/Digital Part, or how the signal or signals are routed

(stereo or mono).

Settings: L Mono, R Mono, L+R Mono, Stereo

L Mono: Only the L channel is used.

R Mono: Only the R channel is used.

L+R Mono: The L and R channels are mixed and processed in mono.

Stereo: Both the L and R channels are used.

NOTE The sound input only from the [L/MONO] channel is processed in mono.

Volume (A/D Part Volume/Digital Part Volume)

Determines the output level of the A/D Part/Digital Part.

Settings: 0 – 127

Pan (A/D Part Pan/Digital Part Pan)

Determines the stereo pan position of the A/D Part/Digital Part.

Settings: L63 – C – R63

Dry Level (A/D Part Dry Level/Digital Part Dry Level)

Determines the level of the A/D Part/Digital Part which has not been processed with the System Effect. This

is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Var Send (A/D Part Variation Send / Digital Part Variation Send)

Determines the Send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part signal sent to the Variation effect. This is available

only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Audio In

Mixing

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Audio In]  [Mixing]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Common/Audio Edit

Common/Audio

General

Audio In

Mixing

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Control

Control Assign

Control Number

Effect

Routing

Variation

Reverb

Master FX

Master EQ

148

Reference

Rev Send (A/D Part Reverb Send/Digital Part Reverb Send)

Determines the Send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part signal sent to the Reverb effect. This is available

only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Output Select (A/D Part Part Output Select/Digital Part Part Output Select)

Determines the specific output(s) for the individual A/D Part/Digital Part signal.

Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB1&2…USB29&30, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1 – 30, Off

MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.

USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.

AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.

USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.

From the Routing display you can determine the Effect connections for the A/D Part.

Insertion FX Switch (Insertion Effect Switch)

Determines whether the Insertion Effect A/B is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

Category (Effect Category)

Type (Effect Type)

Determines the category and type for the selected Effect.

Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the

description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Preset

Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific

applications and situations. You can change how the sound is affected by the selected pre-programmed

settings.

Settings: For a list of all Preset Effects, see the Data List PDF document.

Routing

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Audio In]  [Routing]

Insertion FX Switch

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Common/Audio Edit

Common/Audio

General

Audio In

Mixing

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Control

Control Assign

Control Number

Effect

Routing

Variation

Reverb

Master FX

Master EQ

149

Reference

Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part)

Determines the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator.

This is not available depending on the Effect Type.

For details on the Side Chain/Modulator, see the Routing display of the Normal Part (AWM2) (page 67).

Settings: Part 1 – 16, A/D, Master, Off

Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type)

Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram

in the display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed. For details, see the section “Effect

connection” (page 19) of the “Basic Structure.”

Settings: Ins AB, Ins BA

Rev Send (Reverb Send)

Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the

Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Var Send (Variation Send)

Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the

Variation effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”

Settings: 0 – 127

Envelope Follower

Calls up the Envelope Follower setting display. For details, see the Routing display (page 68) of Normal

Part (AWM2) Edit. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”

Output Select (Part Output Select)

Determines specific audio output.

Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB1&2…USB29&30, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1 – 30, Off

MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.

USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.

AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.

USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 69).

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 70) except that “3-band

EQ” is inactive.

Ins A (Insertion Effect A)

Ins B (Insertion Effect B)

EQ (Equalizer)

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Common/Audio Edit

Common/Audio

General

Audio In

Mixing

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Control

Control Assign

Control Number

Effect

Routing

Variation

Reverb

Master FX

Master EQ

150

Reference

From the Common display you can set the parameters related to Motion Sequencer commonly used for all

Parts in Common/Audio Part.

Common Clock Swing (Common Swing)

Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This is the offset

value for the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for each Part.

Settings: -120 – +120

Common Clock Unit (Common Unit Multiply)

Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the entire Performance.

This parameter is applied to the Part when the Unit Multiply parameter for the Part is set to “Common.”

By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer type from the original one.

Settings: 50% – 400%

200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.

100%: The normal playback time.

50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.

Common Arp Gate Time (Common Arpeggio Gate Time)

Determines the Gate Time Rate (length) of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value

for the Gate Time Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.

Settings: -100 – +100

Common Arp Velocity (Common Arpeggio Velocity Rate)

Determines the Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the

Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.

Settings: -100 – +100

Common Motion Seq Amplitude (Common Motion Sequencer Amplitude)

Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Amplitude” determines

how the entire Motion Sequence changes.

This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Amplitude, which is also the offset value for the Lane

Amplitude. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Amplitudes offset the Amplitude setting in

the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).

Settings: -64 – +63

Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer)

Common

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Motion Seq]  [Common]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Common/Audio Edit

Common/Audio

General

Audio In

Mixing

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Control

Control Assign

Control Number

Effect

Routing

Variation

Reverb

Master FX

Master EQ

151

Reference

Common Motion Seq Shape (Common Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)

Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This changes the step

curve shape of the sequence.

This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Pulse Shape, which is also the offset value for the Lane

Pulse Shape. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Pulse Shapes offset the Pulse Shape

setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on

for the parameter).

Settings: -100 – +100

Common Motion Seq Smooth (Common Motion Sequencer Smoothness)

Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Smoothness” is the

degree to which the time of the Motion Sequence is smoothly changed.

This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Smoothness, which is also the offset value for the Lane

Smoothness. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Smoothnesses offset the Smoothness

setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).

Settings: -64 – +63

Common Motion Seq Random (Common Motion Sequencer Random)

Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Random” is the degree to

which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.

This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Random when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane.

Settings: -64 – +63

Random (A/D Part Motion Sequencer Random)

Determines the degree of random change in the Step Value of the Motion Sequence for the A/D Part is. For

details about “Random,” see “Quick Edit” on page 32.

Settings: 0 – 127

Sync Part (Motion Sequencer Sync Part)

Determines the Part for synchronizing to the Motion Sequencer. The Motion Sequencer is synchronized to

the Note On setting and the Arp/Motion Seq Grid setting of the specified Part.

Settings: Part 1 – Part 16

Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid)

Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is

displayed in clocks. For Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length. This setting is applied

to the Part which is selected as the Sync Part (above).

Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),

480 (1/4 note)

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 81).

Lane

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Common/Audio Edit

Common/Audio

General

Audio In

Mixing

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Control

Control Assign

Control Number

Effect

Routing

Variation

Reverb

Master FX

Master EQ

152

Reference

Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 89), except for the

following parameters.

Destination

When “Source” is set to “AsgnKnob 1 – 8,” “Part 1 – 16 Assign 1 – 8” are added as this parameter values.

In this case, “Curve Type” and “Curve Ratio” are not selectable.

Settings: See the “Control List” in the Data List PDF document.

Source

When “Destination” is set to “Part 1 – 16 Assign 1 – 8,” only “AsgnKnob 1 – 8” can be set for this parameter.

Settings: AsgnKnob 1 – 8, MS Lane 1 – 4, EnvFollow 1 – 16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst

Control

Control Assign

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Control]  [Control Assign]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Common/Audio Edit

Common/Audio

General

Audio In

Mixing

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Control

Control Assign

Control Number

Effect

Routing

Variation

Reverb

Master FX

Master EQ

153

Reference

Determines the MIDI Control Change numbers common for the entire system. You can use the Knobs on

the front panel and external controllers by assigning appropriate MIDI Control Change numbers.

NOTE External controllers include external sequencers and external MIDI controllers.

Ribbon Ctrl (Ribbon Controller Control Number)

Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the Ribbon Controller.

Even when the instrument receives MIDI message with the same Control Change Number specified here

from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the

Ribbon Controller.

Settings: Off, 1 – 95

Breath Ctrl (Breath Controller Control Number)

Determines the Control Change Number received from the external equipment such as a Breath Controller.

Even when the instrument receives MIDI message with the same Control Change Number specified here

from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the

Breath Controller.

Settings: Off, 1 – 95

Foot Ctrl 1/Foot Ctrl 2

(Foot Controller 1 Control Number/Foot Controller 2 Control Number)

Determines the Control Change Number generated by using a Foot Controller connected to the FOOT

CONTROLLER [1] /[2] jack.

Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here

from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the Foot

Controller.

Settings: Off, 1 – 95, Super Knob

Assign SW 1/Assign SW 2

(Assignable Switch 1 Control Number/Assignable Switch 2 Control Number)

Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the [ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] button

(Assignable Switch 1/2).

Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here

from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the

[ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] button (Assignable Switch 1/2.)

Settings: Off, 1 – 95

Control Number

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Control]  [Control Number]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Common/Audio Edit

Common/Audio

General

Audio In

Mixing

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Control

Control Assign

Control Number

Effect

Routing

Variation

Reverb

Master FX

Master EQ

154

Reference

MS Hold (Motion Sequencer Hold Control Number)

Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] (Motion

Sequencer Hold) button.

Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here

from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the

[MOTION SEQ HOLD] (Motion Sequencer Hold) button.

Settings: Off, 1 – 95

MS Trigger (Motion Sequencer Trigger Control Number)

Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] (Motion

Sequencer Trigger) button.

Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here

from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the

[MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] (Motion Sequencer Trigger) button.

Settings: Off, 1 – 95

Assign Knob 1 – 8 (Assignable Knob 1 – 8 Control Number)

Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the Assignable Knob 1 – 8.

Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here

from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the

Assignable Knob 1 – 8.

Settings: Off, 1 – 95

From this display you can determine the System Effect and Master Effect connections that commonly

affect all Parts.

Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Switch

Determines whether Variation/Reverb/Master Effect is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

Effect

Routing

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Effect]  [Routing]

Reverb Switch Variation Switch

Master Effect Switch

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Common/Audio Edit

Common/Audio

General

Audio In

Mixing

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Control

Control Assign

Control Number

Effect

Routing

Variation

Reverb

Master FX

Master EQ

155

Reference

Category (Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Category)

Type (Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Type)

Determines the category and type for the selected effect.

Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the

description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Preset (Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Preset)

Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Variation/Reverb/Master Effect type, designed to

be used for specific applications and situations.

Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document.

Side Chain/Modulator (Variation/Master Effect Side Chain/Modulator Part)

Determines the Part used for Side Chain/Modulator for Variation/Master Effect.

This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.

Settings: Part 1 – 16, A/D, Master, Off

Var Return (Variation Return)

Rev Return (Reverb Return)

Determines the return level of the Variation/Reverb effect.

Settings: 0 – 127

Var Pan (Variation Pan)

Rev Pan (Reverb Pan)

Determines the pan position of the Variation/Reverb effect.

Settings: L63 (far left) – C (center) – R63 (far right)

Var to Rev (Variation to Reverb)

Determines the Send level of the signal sent from the Variation Effect to the Reverb Effect.

Settings: 0 – 127

Master EQ (Master Equalizer Switch)

Determines whether the Master EQ is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

Envelope Follower

Calls up the Envelope Follower setting display. See the Routing display (page 67) for the Normal Part

(AWM2).

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Common/Audio Edit

Common/Audio

General

Audio In

Mixing

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Control

Control Assign

Control Number

Effect

Routing

Variation

Reverb

Master FX

Master EQ

156

Reference

From this display you can determine the detailed settings of the Variation effect.

Variation Switch

Determines whether the Variation effect is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

Category (Variation Category)

Type (Variation Type)

Determines the category and type for the selected effect.

Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the

description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Preset (Variation Preset)

Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific

applications and situations.

Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document.

Side Chain/Modulator (Variation Effect Side Chain/Modulator Part)

Determines the Part used for Side Chain/Modulator for Variation Effect.

This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.

Settings: Part 1 – 16, A/D, Master, Off

Effect Parameter

Editable parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect

parameters for each Effect Type, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for

each Effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Variation

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Effect]  [Variation]

Variation Switch Effect Parameter

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Common/Audio Edit

Common/Audio

General

Audio In

Mixing

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Control

Control Assign

Control Number

Effect

Routing

Variation

Reverb

Master FX

Master EQ

157

Reference

From this display you can determine the detailed settings of the Reverb effect.

Reverb Switch

Determines whether the Reverb effect is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

Category (Reverb Category)

Type (Reverb Type)

Determines the category and type for the selected effect.

Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the

description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Preset (Reverb Preset)

Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific

applications and situations.

Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document.

Effect Parameter

Editable parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect

parameters for each Effect Type, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for

each Effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Reverb

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Effect]  [Reverb]

Reverb Switch

Effect Parameter

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Common/Audio Edit

Common/Audio

General

Audio In

Mixing

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Control

Control Assign

Control Number

Effect

Routing

Variation

Reverb

Master FX

Master EQ

158

Reference

From this display you can determine the detailed settings of the Master Effect.

Master Effect Switch

Determines whether the Master Effect is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

Category (Master Effect Category)

Type (Master Effect Type)

Determines the category and type for the selected effect.

Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the

description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Preset (Master Effect Preset)

Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific

applications and situations.

Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document.

Side Chain/Modulator (Master Effect Side Chain/Modulator Part)

Determines the Part used for Side Chain/Modulator for Master Effect.

This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.

Settings: Part 1 – 16, A/D, Master, Off

Effect Parameter

Editable parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect

parameters for each Effect Type, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for

each Effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.

Master FX (Master Effect)

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Effect]  [Master FX]

Master Effect Switch

Effect Parameter

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Common/Audio Edit

Common/Audio

General

Audio In

Mixing

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Control

Control Assign

Control Number

Effect

Routing

Variation

Reverb

Master FX

Master EQ

159

Reference

From this display you can set parameters related to the Master EQ.

Master EQ Switch

Determines whether the Master EQ is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

Low Gain (Master EQ Low Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low band.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

Lo Mid Gain (Master EQ Low Mid Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low Mid band.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

Mid Gain (Master EQ Mid Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Mid band.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

Hi Mid Gain (Master EQ High Mid Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High Mid band.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

High Gain (Master EQ High Gain)

Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High band.

Settings: -12dB – +12dB

Low Freq (Master EQ Low Frequency)

Determines the frequency for the Master Low band.

Settings: 32Hz – 2.0kHz

Lo Mid Freq (Master EQ Low Mid Frequency)

Determines the frequency for the Master Low Mid band.

Settings: 100Hz – 10kHz

Master EQ (Master Equalizer)

Operation [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  PART [COMMON]  [Effect]  [Master EQ]

Master EQ Switch

Low Shape High Shape

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Common/Audio Edit

Common/Audio

General

Audio In

Mixing

Routing

Ins A

Ins B

Motion Seq

Common

Lane

Control

Control Assign

Control Number

Effect

Routing

Variation

Reverb

Master FX

Master EQ

160

Reference

Mid Freq (Master EQ Mid Frequency)

Determines the frequency for the Master Mid band.

Settings: 100Hz – 10kHz

Hi Mid Freq (Master EQ High Mid Frequency)

Determines the frequency for the Master High Mid band.

Settings: 100Hz – 10kHz

High Freq (Master EQ High Frequency)

Determines the frequency for the Master High band.

Settings: 500Hz – 16kHz

Low Q (Master EQ Low Q)

Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master Low band. This is available only when the Master EQ Low

Shape (below) is set to “Peak.”

Settings: 0.1 – 12.0

Lo Mid Q (Master EQ Low Mid Q)

Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master Low Mid band.

Settings: 0.1 – 12.0

Mid Q (Master EQ Mid Q)

Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master Mid band.

Settings: 0.1 – 12.0

Hi Mid Q (Master EQ High Mid Q)

Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master High Mid band.

Settings: 0.1 – 12.0

High Q (Master EQ High Q)

Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master High band. This is available only when the Master EQ High

Shape (below) is set to “Peak.”

Settings: 0.1 – 12.0

Low Shape (Master EQ Low Shape)

High Shape (Master EQ High Shape)

Determines whether the equalizer type used is Shelving or Peaking. The Peaking type attenuates/boosts

the signal at the specified Frequency setting, whereas the Shelving type attenuates/boosts the signal at

frequencies above or below the specified Frequency setting. This parameter is available only for the LOW

and HIGH frequency bands.

Settings: Shelf (Shelving Type), Peak (Peaking Type)

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance Category

Arp Category

Waveform

161

Reference

Category Search

The Performances/Arpeggios/Waveforms are conveniently divided into specific Categories. The

categories are divided based on the general instrument type or sound characteristics. The Category

Search function gives you quick access to the sounds you want.

Performance Category Search

From the Performance Category Search display you can search and select the Performance.

 In case of Performance Category Search

Bank (Performance Bank Select)

Filters the Performance List by Bank.

Settings: All, Preset, User, Library Name (when the Library file is read)

Attribute (Performance Attribute)

Filters the Performance List by Attribute (page 145). This is not available for Part Category Search.

Settings: All, AWM2, FM, FM-X+AWM2, MC, SSS, Single, Multi

Name Search (Performance Name Search)

Searches the Performance by inputting a part of the Performance Name.

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Main (Performance Main Category)

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Sub (Performance Sub Category)

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Audition (Audition Switch)

Determines whether the Audition phrase is played back or not. This is not available when “Audition Lock”

(page 171) is set to on in the Utility display.

Settings: Off, On

Operation

[PERFORMANCE]  [CATEGORY] (Performance Category Search)

Touch the Performance Name  Select [Search] from the displayed menu

Name Search

Performance list

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance Category

Arp Category

Waveform

162

Reference

Sort (Sort Order)

Determines the Sort Order of the Performance List.

Settings: Default, Name, Date

Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the

upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.

Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to

older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order.

 In case of Part Category Search

Solo (Solo Switch)

Determines the Solo function is active (On) or not (Off.) When this is set to on and any sound is assigned to

the Part, only the Part will be sounded.

Settings: Off, On

Param. with Part (Parameter with Part)

Determines whether or not to read and use the parameter values for the next Performance. When the set of

parameters is set to off, the current setting values are continuously used even when the next Performance

is selected.

The “Zone” parameter is available only when “Zone Master” (page 171) is set to on in the Utility display.

Settings: Arp/MS, Scene, Zone

Operation

[PERFORMANCE]  Part selection  [SHIFT]+[CATEGORY] (Part Category Search)

(When the Part to which any sounds are assigned is selected) Touch the Part Name  Select [Search]

from the displayed menu

(When the Part to which no sound is assigned is selected) Touch “+” icon

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance Category

Arp Category

Waveform

163

Reference

Arpeggio Category Search (Arp Category Search)

From the Arpeggio Category Search display you can search and select Arpeggio Types.

Bank (Arpeggio Bank Select)

Filters the Arpeggio List by Bank.

Settings: All, Preset, User, Library Name (when the Library file is read)

Name Search (Arpeggio Name Search)

Searches for an Arpeggio by inputting a part of the Arpeggio Name.

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Main (Arpeggio Category)

Settings: See the Arpeggio Category List (page 11).

Sub (Arpeggio Sub Category)

Settings: See the Arpeggio Sub Category List (page 11).

Sort (Sort Order)

Determines the Sort Order of the Arpeggio Type List.

Settings: Default, Name, Date

Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the

upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.

Date: Sorts in order of loading. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer

to older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order.

Operation Arpeggio related display  Part selection  [CATEGORY]

Name Search

Arpeggio Type list

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Performance Category

Arp Category

Waveform

164

Reference

Waveform Category Search (Waveform Search)

From the Waveform Category Search display you can search and select the Waveforms.

Bank (Waveform Bank Select)

Filters the Waveform List by Bank.

Settings: All, Preset, User, Library Name (when the Library file is read)

Name Search (Waveform Name Search)

Searches for a Waveform by inputting a part of the Waveform Name.

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Main (Waveform Category)

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Sub (Waveform Sub Category)

Settings: See the Data List PDF document.

Sort (Sort Order)

Determines the Sort Order of the Waveform List.

Settings: Default, Name, Date

Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the

upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.

Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to

older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order.

Operation Waveform related display  Part selection  Waveform selection  [CATEGORY]

Name Search

Waveform list

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Uitlity

Settings

Sound

Quick Setup

Audio I/O

MIDI I/O

Advanced

System

Contents

Load

Store / Save

Data Utility

Tempo Settings

Effect Switch

165

Reference

Utility

The Utility display has four tabs; the Setting tab, the Contents tab, the Tempo Settings tab, and the Effect

Switch tab. You can make various settings for the entire system.

From the Sound display you can make overall settings for the sounds output from the instrument.

Tone Generator Volume

Determines the overall volume of the instrument.

Settings: 0 – 127

Tone Generator Note Shift

Determines the amount (in semitones) by which the pitch of all notes is shifted.

Settings: -24semi – +24semi

Tone Generator Tune

Determines the fine tuning of the instrument’s overall sound (in 0.1 cent steps).

Settings: -102.4 – +102.3

Sustain Pedal (Footswitch Sustain Pedal Select)

Selects the Footswitch type connected to the FOOT SWITCH [SUSTAIN] jack on the rear panel.

• When the FC3 or FC3A is used:

When you connect an optional FC3 or FC3A (equipped with the half-damper feature) for producing

the special “half-damper” effect (as on a real acoustic piano), set this parameter to “FC3A (Half on).”

If you don’t need the half-damper feature or want to disable it while still using an FC3 or FC3A, set

this parameter to “FC3A (Half off).”

• When the FC4, FC4A, or FC5 is used:

Select “FC4A/FC5.” The FC4, FC4A, and FC5 are not equipped with the half-damper feature.

Settings: FC3A (Half On), FC3A (Half Off), FC4A/FC5

NOTE Note that this setting is not necessary when controlling the half-damper feature via Control Change messages

from an external MIDI device to the instrument.

Settings

Sound

Operation [UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Sound]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Uitlity

Settings

Sound

Quick Setup

Audio I/O

MIDI I/O

Advanced

System

Contents

Load

Store / Save

Data Utility

Tempo Settings

Effect Switch

166

Reference

Keyboard Octave Shift

Determines the amount in octaves by which the range of the keyboard is shifted up or down. This

parameter is linked with the OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons on the panel.

Settings: -3 – +3

Keyboard Transpose

This parameter is used to transpose the current zone in units of one semitone.

Settings: -11semi – +11semi

NOTE If you transpose beyond the note range limits (C -2 – G8), notes in the adjacent octaves will be used.

Keyboard Velocity Curve

These five curves determine how the actual velocity will be generated and transmitted according to the

velocity (strength) with which you play notes on the keyboard. The graph shown in the display indicates

the velocity response curve. (The horizontal line represents the received velocity values (strength of your

playing), while the vertical line represents the actual velocity values transmitted to the internal/external

tone generators.)

Settings: Normal, Soft, Hard, Wide, Fixed

Normal: This linear “curve” produces one-to-one correspondence between the strength of your keyboard playing

(velocity) and the actual sound change.

Soft: This curve provides increased response, especially for lower velocities.

Hard: This curve provides increased response, especially for higher velocities.

Wide: This curve accentuates your playing strength by producing lower velocities in response to softer playing and

louder velocities in response to harder playing. As such, you can use this setting to expand your dynamic range.

Fixed: This setting produces the same amount of sound change (set in Keyboard Fixed Velocity below), no matter

what your playing strength. The velocity of the notes you play are fixed at the value set here.

Keyboard Fixed Velocity

The Fixed curve can be used to send a fixed velocity to the tone generator regardless of how hard or soft

you play the keyboard. This parameter is only available if you select the “Fixed” Keyboard Velocity Curve

above.

Settings: 1 – 127

Using Quick Setup can instantly call up appropriate sequencer-related panel settings by selecting

convenient preset setups, allowing you to simultaneously and instantly set a variety of important

sequencer-related parameters.

Quick Setup

Operation [UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Quick Setup], [SHIFT] + [UTILITY], or

Touch the QUICK SETUP icon

QUICK SETUP icon

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Uitlity

Settings

Sound

Quick Setup

Audio I/O

MIDI I/O

Advanced

System

Contents

Load

Store / Save

Data Utility

Tempo Settings

Effect Switch

167

Reference

Audio Signal Flow

Indicates the Audio signal connections. The connections will change depending on the status of the [USB

TO HOST] terminal and the general settings of the instrument.

MIDI Signal Flow

Indicates the MIDI signal connections. The connections will change depending on the general settings of

the instrument.

Quick Setup

Determines the Quick Setups.

Settings: Standalone, 1 – 3

The parameters for Quick Setups are as follows.

For details about parameters related to Audio Settings, see “Audio I/O” (page 168). For details about

parameters related to MIDI Settings, see “MIDI I/O” (page 169).

The default settings for Quick Setups are as follows.

 Standalone

Use this setting when this instrument is to be used alone or as the master clock source for other

equipment.

 MIDI Rec on DAW

Use this setting when recording this instrument’s performance (not including Arpeggio data) to the

DAW software.

 Arp Rec on DAW

Use this setting when recording this instrument’s performance including Arpeggio data to the DAW

software.

Audio Settings A/D Input Gain

Main L&R Gain

Assign L&R Gain

USB Main L&R Gain

USB 1-30 Gain

Direct Monitor Switch

MIDI Settings MIDI In/Out

Local Control

Arp MIDI Out

MIDI Sync

Clock Out

Receive/Transmit Sequencer Control

Controller Reset

FS CC Number

Part Output Settings Part 1-16 Output Select

A/D In Output Select

Digital In Output Select

Local Control Direct Monitor Output Select Arp MIDI Out

On On Main L&R Off

Local Control Direct Monitor Output Select Arp MIDI Out

Off On Main L&R Off

Local Control Direct Monitor Output Select Arp MIDI Out

Off On Main L&R On

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Uitlity

Settings

Sound

Quick Setup

Audio I/O

MIDI I/O

Advanced

System

Contents

Load

Store / Save

Data Utility

Tempo Settings

Effect Switch

168

Reference

 Audio Rec on DAW

Use this setting when recording the signals from the tone generator and the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R]

jacks separately to DAW software, and playing the signals from the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks

directly.

Store Current Settings

Stores the edited settings as 1 – 3 of “QuickSetup.”

From the Audio I/O display you can set the parameters related to Audio Input and Output.

A/D Input (A/D Input Gain)

When using the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks, this determines the input source, microphone (Mic) or

Line.

Settings: Mic, Line

Mic: Intended for low output equipment, such as a microphone.

Line: Intended for high output equipment, such as a keyboard, synthesizer, or CD player.

NOTE A guitar or bass having active pickups can be directly connected. However, when using passive pickups,

connect the instrument via an effect device.

Audio I/O Mode

Determines the Output mode of the Audio signal input from the [USB TO HOST] terminal. To activate this

setting, the instrument needs to be rebooted.

Settings: 16 Stereo/44.1kHz, 4 Stereo/44.1-192kHz

16 Stereo/44.1kHz: Audio data sending capability for the instrument is a maximum 32 channels (16 stereo

channels) at a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

4 Stereo/44.1-192kHz: Audio data sending capability for the instrument is a maximum 8 channels (4 stereo

channels) for a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz to 192 kHz.

NOTE When “4 Stereo/44.1-192kHz” is selected, available frequencies are only 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, and

192 kHz.

Main L&R (Main L&R Output Gain)

Determines the output gain of the OUTPUT (BALANCED) [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

Settings: -6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB

Local Control Direct Monitor Output Select Arp MIDI Out

On Off Depends on the Part Off

Audio I/O

Operation [UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Audio I/O]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Uitlity

Settings

Sound

Quick Setup

Audio I/O

MIDI I/O

Advanced

System

Contents

Load

Store / Save

Data Utility

Tempo Settings

Effect Switch

169

Reference

Assign L&R (Assign L&R Output Gain)

Determines the output gain of the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT (BALANCED) [L]/[R] jacks.

Settings: -6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB

USB Main (USB Main L&R Output Gain)

Determines the output gain of the Main L&R channel of the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

Settings: -6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB

USB 1-30 (USB 1 – 30 Output Gain)

Determines the output gain of 1 – 30 channels of the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

Settings: -6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB

Direct Monitor (Direct Monitor Switch)

Determines whether or not the audio signal which is output to the external device via the “Main L&R (USB

Out)” or “USB 1-30” channels also sounds from this instrument (Direct Monitoring). When this is set to “on,”

the audio signal which is output via the “Main L&R (USB Out)” or “USB 1-30” channels is also output to the

OUTPUT (BALANCED) [L/MONO]/[R] jacks and [PHONES] jack. When the external device is not

connected via USB cable, the Direct Monitor Switch is automatically turned on.

Settings: Off, On

From the MIDI I/O display you can set parameters related to MIDI Input and Output.

MIDI IN/OUT

Determines which physical output/input terminal(s) will be used for transmitting/receiving MIDI data.

Settings: MIDI, USB

NOTE The two types of terminals above cannot be used at the same time. Only one of them can be used to transmit/

receive MIDI data.

Local Control

This determines whether or not the tone generator of the instrument responds to your keyboard playing.

Normally, this should be set to “on” — since you’ll want to hear the sound of the instrument as you play it.

Even if this is set to “off,” the data will be transmitted via MIDI. Also, the internal tone generator block will

respond to messages received via MIDI.

Settings: Off, On

MIDI I/O

Operation [UTILITY]  [Settings]  [MIDI I/O]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Uitlity

Settings

Sound

Quick Setup

Audio I/O

MIDI I/O

Advanced

System

Contents

Load

Store / Save

Data Utility

Tempo Settings

Effect Switch

170

Reference

Arp MIDI Out (Arpeggio MIDI Out)

Determines whether to output MIDI data of Arpeggio playback or not.

Settings: Off, On

MIDI Sync

You can set various parameters related to MIDI clock and synchronization here.

Determines whether Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer/Song playback will be synchronized to the instrument’s

internal clock, an external MIDI clock, or the Audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

Settings: Internal, MIDI, A/D In

Internal: Synchronization to internal clock. You can use this setting when this tone generator is to be used alone or

as the master clock source for other equipment.

MIDI: Synchronization to a MIDI clock received from an external MIDI instrument via MIDI. Use this setting when the

external sequencer is to be used as master.

A/D In: Synchronization to the tempo of the Audio signal received via the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

Clock Out

Determines whether MIDI clock messages will be transmitted via MIDI or not.

Settings: Off, On

Receive (Receive Sequencer Control)

Determines whether the Sequencer Control signals – start and stop of Song – will be received via MIDI or

not.

Settings: Off, On

Transmit (Transmit Sequencer Control)

Determines whether the Sequencer Control signals – start and stop of Song – will be transmitted to MIDI or

not.

Settings: Off, On

Controller Reset

Determines the status of the controllers (Modulation Wheel, Aftertouch, Foot Controller, Breath Controller,

Knobs, etc.) when switching between Performances. When this is set to “Hold,” the controllers are kept at

the current setting. When this is set to “Reset,” the controllers are reset to the default states (below).

Settings: Hold, Reset

If you select “reset,” the controllers will be reset to the following states/positions:

FS Assign (Footswitch Assign Control Number)

Determines the Control Change number generated by using the Footswitch connected to the FOOT

SWITCH [ASSIGNABLE] jack. Even when the instrument receives MIDI message with the same Control

Change Number specified here from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is

generated by using the Footswitch.

Settings: Off, 1 – 95, Arp SW, MS SW, Play/Stop, Live Set+, Live Set-, Oct Reset

Pitch Bend Center

Modulation Wheel Minimum

Aftertouch Minimum

Foot Controller Maximum

Footswitch Off

Ribbon Controller Center

Breath Controller Maximum

Expression Maximum

Assignable Switches 1 and 2 Off

Motion Sequencer Hold Off

Each Lane of Motion Sequencer 0 (minimum) when Lane Motion Sequencer

Polarity is set to “Unipolar”

64 (center) when Lane Motion Sequencer

Polarity is set to “Bipolar”

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Uitlity

Settings

Sound

Quick Setup

Audio I/O

MIDI I/O

Advanced

System

Contents

Load

Store / Save

Data Utility

Tempo Settings

Effect Switch

171

Reference

From the Advanced display you can set the advanced parameters.

Zone Master (Zone Master Switch)

Determines whether the Zone function is used (on) or not (off).

Settings: Off, On

Audition Lock

Determines whether the Audition Lock is active or not. When this is set to On, the Audition function is not

available.

Settings: Off, On

Device Number

Determines the MIDI Device Number. This number must match the Device Number of the external MIDI

device when transmitting/receiving bulk data, parameter changes or other System Exclusive messages.

Settings: 1 – 16, All, Off

Bank Select

This switch enables or disables Bank Select messages, both in transmission and reception. When this is

set to “on,” this synthesizer responds to incoming Bank Select messages.

Settings: Off, On

Pgm Change (Program Change)

This switch enables or disables Program Change messages, both in transmission and reception. When

this is set to “on,” this synthesizer responds to incoming Program Change messages.

Settings: Off, On

Receive Bulk

Determines whether or not Bulk Dump data can be received.

Settings: Protect (not received), On (received)

Bulk Interval

Determines the interval time of the Bulk Dump transmission when a Bulk Dump Request is received.

Settings: 0ms – 900ms

Advanced

Operation [UTILITY]  [Settings]  [Advanced]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Uitlity

Settings

Sound

Quick Setup

Audio I/O

MIDI I/O

Advanced

System

Contents

Load

Store / Save

Data Utility

Tempo Settings

Effect Switch

172

Reference

Event Chase (Song Event Chase)

Event Chase allows you to specify which non-note data types are properly recognized during fast-forward

and rewind operations. Setting this to a specific event ensures the playback integrity of the event, even

when fast forwarding or rewinding.

Settings: Off, PC (Program Change), PC+PB+Ctrl (Program Change+Pitch Bend+Control Change)

Init On Boot (Initialize User Data on Boot-up)

Determines whether the User Data is initialized (On) or not (Off) when the power of the instrument is turned

on.

Settings: Off, On

Initialize Advanced Settings

Initializes the system settings edited in the Advanced display.

NOTICE

When the Initialize operation is executed, the target data and system settings you edited will be erased. Make

sure you are not overwriting any important data. Be sure to save all important data to your USB flash memory

device before executing this procedure.

From the System display you can make global system settings for the instrument.

Power on Mode

Determines the start-up display (which is automatically called up when power is turned on).

Settings: Perform, Live Set

Auto Power Off

To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that

automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. This

parameter determines the amount of time that elapses before the power is automatically turned off.

Settings: Off, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120min

Animation (Animation Switch)

Determines whether the animation of screen transition is turned on or off.

Settings: Off, On

System

Operation [UTILITY]  [Settings]  [System]

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Uitlity

Settings

Sound

Quick Setup

Audio I/O

MIDI I/O

Advanced

System

Contents

Load

Store / Save

Data Utility

Tempo Settings

Effect Switch

173

Reference

Blur (Blur Switch)

When any display is selected, the display previously selected is blurred. This parameter determines

whether the Blur function is turned on or off.

Settings: Off, On

Beep (Beep Switch)

Determines whether the beep sound (that confirms operations, menu/parameter selection, etc.) is turned

on or off.

Settings: Off, On

Knob Flash (Super Knob LED Switch)

Determines whether the flashing function of the Super Knob is turned on or off.

Settings: Off, On

KnobBrightness (Knob Brightness)

Controls the brightness of the lighting of the Super Knob.

Settings: 0 – 128

Half Glow (LED Half Glow Brightness)

Controls the dimming of the button lamps.

Settings: Off, 1/4, 1/2

Calibrate Touch Panel

Calls up the Calibration display for the Touch Panel. Calibration of the touch panel may be necessary if the

touch panel does not respond correctly.

Initialize All Settings

Initializes all system settings you created on the Utility display.

Initialize User Data

Initializes User data (Performance, Motion Sequence, and Live Set) in the specified area of the User

memory and system settings you created on the Utility display.

Initialize All Data

Initializes all User data in the User memory and all system settings you created on the Utility display.

NOTICE

When the Initialize operation is executed, all target data and system settings you created will be erased. Make

sure you are not overwriting any important data. Be sure to save all important data to your USB flash memory

device before executing this procedure.

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Uitlity

Settings

Sound

Quick Setup

Audio I/O

MIDI I/O

Advanced

System

Contents

Load

Store / Save

Data Utility

Tempo Settings

Effect Switch

174

Reference

From the Load display you can load files and data.

Content Type

Among the various types of data saved in a single file on a USB flash memory or this instrument, you can

load all of them to this synthesizer at once or only a specific, desired type of data. This parameter

determines which specific type of data will be loaded from a single file. The editable parameters differ

depending on how you arrive at this display.

Settings: The file types which can be loaded as follows.

Contents

Load

Operation [UTILITY]  [Contents]  [Load]

File Types Device Type Extension Description

User File File .X7U Files of the “User File” type saved to USB flash memory

can be loaded and restored to the dedicated area in the

User Memory of the instrument (page 22).

User File Type data is as follows.

• Performance

•Arpeggio

• Motion Sequence

•Curve

•Live Set

• Micro Tuning

• Waveform

• Utility settings

• Quick Setup

Library File File .X7L Files of the “Library File” type saved to USB flash memory

can be loaded and restored to the dedicated area in the

User Memory of the instrument (page 22).

Library File Type data is as follows.

• Performance

•Arpeggio

• Motion Sequence

•Curve

•Live Set

• Micro Tuning

• Waveform

Parent Folder Name Current Folder Name Free Storage

Folder/File select

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Uitlity

Settings

Sound

Quick Setup

Audio I/O

MIDI I/O

Advanced

System

Contents

Load

Store / Save

Data Utility

Tempo Settings

Effect Switch

175

Reference

NOTE Files with an asterisk (*) are not displayed when you call up this display from the Utility display.

Parent Folder Name

Current Folder Name

Indicates the Parent Folder name and the current selected Folder Name. Once you touch the Parent Folder

Name, the Folder becomes the currently selected folder.

Free Storage

Indicates the free space and the full space of the selected storage area.

This parameter differs depending on the Content Type.

Folder/File Select

Indicates Folders/Files in the selected Folder.

Sort (Sort Order)

Determines the Sort Order of the Files in “File Select.”

Settings: Name, Size, Date, Number

Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the

upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.

Size: Sorts in order of data size. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (small to

big.) When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in opposite order. This is not available for “Motion Seq,”

“Song,” and “Song&Perf” type Files.

Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to

older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. This is available only for “Motion

Seq,” “Song,” and “Song&Perf” type Files.

Number: Sorts in order of Content Number. This is available only for “Song” and “Song&Perf” type Files.

Page (Page Select)

When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through

the pages.

Job (Job Switch)

Determines whether the Job function is active (On) or not (Off.) When this parameter is turned on, touching

the File/Folder/Content in “File Select” calls up the menu to select “Rename” or “Delete.”

Touching the currently connected USB device calls up the menu to select “Format.”

Settings: Off, On

Song&Perf Internal data A specified Song in a file that is saved to the dedicated

area in the User Memory as a “Song” type can be

individually selected and loaded (played back) to the

instrument. Both of MIDI sequence and Performance data

can be loaded.

Song Internal data A specified Song in a file that is saved to the dedicated

area in the User Memory as a “Song” type can be

individually selected and loaded (played back) to the

instrument. Only MIDI sequence data can be loaded.

.mid File File .MID Standard MIDI File (SMF in format 0, 1) data that is saved

to USB flash memory can be loaded and played back.

.wav File File .WAV Audio data (Wave File) that is saved to USB flash memory

can be loaded and played back.

Audio File* File .WAV

.AIF

Audio data (Wave File and AIFF File) that is saved to USB

flash memory can be loaded and as “Waveform.”

Example: [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection 

Element selection  [Osc/Tune]  “New Waveform”

Motion Seq* Internal data A specified Sequence data in a file that is saved to the

dedicated area in the User Memory as an “Motion Seq”

type can be individually selected and loaded to the

instrument.

Example: [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection 

ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Motion Seq] 

[Lane]  “Load Sequence”

File Types Device Type Extension Description

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Uitlity

Settings

Sound

Quick Setup

Audio I/O

MIDI I/O

Advanced

System

Contents

Load

Store / Save

Data Utility

Tempo Settings

Effect Switch

176

Reference

Compatible with the MOTIF XF6/MOTIF XF7/MOTIF XF8 data

The following data can be loaded to MONTAGE6/MONTAGE7/MONTAGE8 among all MOTIF XF6/MOTIF

XF7/MOTIF XF8 data. Please note that the data is loaded as “User File” or “Library File.”

Also you can switch the Content Type between User file and Library file.

From the Store/Save display you can store Files and data.

Content Type

You can store all data or the specified data to the instrument or USB flash memory. This parameter

determines which specific data will be stored/saved.

The editable setting value differs depending on how you arrive at this display.

Settings: The Content Types which can be stored/saved are as follows.

File Type on MOTIF XF Extension on MOTIF XF Contents

All .X3A User Voice, User Arpeggio, User Waveform

AllVoice (All Voice) .X3V User Voice, User Waveform

AllArp (All Arpeggio) .X3G User Arpeggio

AllWaveform (All Waveform) .X3W User Waveform

Store/Save

Operation [UTILITY]  [Contents]  [Store / Save] or

Press the [STORE] button

File Types Device Type Extension Description

Performance Internal data Data can be stored to the dedicated area in the User

Memory as a “Performance” (page 22).

Parent Folder Name Current Folder Name Free Storage

File select

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Uitlity

Settings

Sound

Quick Setup

Audio I/O

MIDI I/O

Advanced

System

Contents

Load

Store / Save

Data Utility

Tempo Settings

Effect Switch

177

Reference

NOTE Files with an asterisk (*) are not displayed when you call up this display from the Utility display.

Parent Folder Name

Current Folder Name

Indicates the parent folder name and the current selected folder name. Once you touch the Parent Folder

Name, the Folder becomes the currently selected folder.

Free Storage

Indicates the free space and the full space of the selected storage area. This parameter differs depending

on the Content Type.

Folder/File Select

Indicates folders/files in the selected folder.

Sort (Sort Order)

Determines the sort order of the files in “File Select.”

Settings: Name, Size, Date

Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the

upper arrow is displayed, the list is arranged in descending order.

Size: Sorts in order of data size. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (small to

big.) When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in opposite order. This is not available for

“Performance” and “Motion Seq” type files.

Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to

older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. This is available only for

“Performance” and “Motion Seq” type files.

Page (Page Select)

When files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through

the pages.

User File File .X7U Data that is stored to the dedicated area in the User

Memory can be saved to USB flash memory.

Data saved as “User File” is as follows.

• Performance

• Arpeggio

• Motion Sequence

•Curve

•Live Set

• Micro Tuning

• Waveform

• Utility Settings

• Quick Setup

Library File File .X7L Data that is stored to the dedicated area in the User

Memory can be saved to USB flash memory.

Data saved as “Library File” is as follows.

• Performance

• Arpeggio

• Motion Sequence

•Curve

•Live Set

• Micro Tuning

• Waveform

.mid File File .MID MIDI data that is stored to the dedicated area in the

User Memory (page 22) can be saved as a Standard

MIDI File (SMF only in format 0) to USB flash memory.

Motion Seq* Internal data Data can be stored as “Motion Seq” to the dedicated

area in the User Memory.

Example: [PERFORMANCE]  [EDIT]  Part selection

 ELEMENT/OPERATOR [COMMON]  [Motion Seq]

 [Lane]  “Edit Sequence” to call up “Motion

Sequence Edit”  “Store Sequence”

File Types Device Type Extension Description

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Uitlity

Settings

Sound

Quick Setup

Audio I/O

MIDI I/O

Advanced

System

Contents

Load

Store / Save

Data Utility

Tempo Settings

Effect Switch

178

Reference

Job (Job Switch)

Determines whether the Job function is active (On) or not (Off.) When this parameter is turned on, touching

the File/Folder/Content in “File Select” calls up the menu to select “Rename” or “Delete.”

Touching the currently connected USB device calls up the menu to select “Format.”

Also you can create a new folder when storing a file.

Settings: Off, On

From the Data Utility display you can control Files and data in the User Memory.

Folder List

Current Folder Name

Indicates the Current Folder Name.

Job (Job Switch)

Determines whether the Job function is active (On) or not (Off). This parameter is available only for the

“Waveform” folder on this display. When the parameter is turned on, touching “Waveform” folder calls

up the menu to select “Optimize.”

Settings: Off, On

Folder Select

Indicates the Content Types in the User Memory as folders. Touching the Folder opens it.

• Arp (Arpeggio)

•Library

•Live Set

• Motion Seq

• Performance

•Song

• Waveform

Page (Page Select)

When folders in “Folder Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to

scroll through the pages.

Data Utility

Operation [UTILITY]  [Contents]  [Data Utility]

Folder select

Current Folder Name

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Uitlity

Settings

Sound

Quick Setup

Audio I/O

MIDI I/O

Advanced

System

Contents

Load

Store / Save

Data Utility

Tempo Settings

Effect Switch

179

Reference

When the selected Folder is opened

Parent Folder Name

Current Folder Name

Indicates the parent folder name and the current selected folder name. Touching the parent folder name

returns to the folder list view.

Free Storage

Indicates the free space and the full space of the selected storage area. This parameter differs depending

on the Content Type.

File Select

Indicates Files in the selected Folder. The Job function is always available in this display. Touching the File/

Content in “File Select” calls up the menu to select “Rename” or “Delete.” (“Rename” is not available for

the Files in “Library” type Folder.)

Sort (Sort Order)

Determines the Sort Order of the Files in “File Select.”

Settings: Name, Size, Date, Number

Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the

upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.

Size: Sorts in order of data size. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (small to

large). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in opposite order. This is available only for “Library”

type Contents.

Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to

older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. This is not available for “Arp” and

“Library” type Contents.

Number: Sorts in order of Content Number. This is available only for “Arp,” “Song,” and “Waveform” type Contents.

Page (Page Select)

When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through

the pages.

Parent Folder Name Current Folder Name Free Storage

File Select

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Uitlity

Settings

Sound

Quick Setup

Audio I/O

MIDI I/O

Advanced

System

Contents

Load

Store / Save

Data Utility

Tempo Settings

Effect Switch

180

Reference

From the Tempo Settings display you can set parameters related to Tempo and Synchronization.

Tempo

Determines the Performance tempo. This parameter is not available when the “MIDI Sync” is set to “MIDI”

or “A/D In” and the instrument is synchronized to an external device (“EX. Tempo” is displayed instead of

the setting value.)

Settings: 5 – 300

Knob Flash (Super Knob LED Switch)

Determines whether the flashing of the Super Knob is turned on or off.

Settings: Off, On

Tap Tempo

Allows you to tap the desired tempo by touching this parameter or by moving the cursor to this parameter

and pressing (tapping) the [ENTER] button on the panel.

This parameter is not displayed when the “MIDI Sync” is set to “MIDI” and the instrument is synchronized

to an external device.

NOTE When “MIDI Sync” is set to “A/D In,” the tempo search starts by touching this parameter.

MIDI Sync

Determines parameters related to MIDI clock and synchronization.

Determines whether Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer/Song playback will be synchronized to the instrument’s

internal clock, an external MIDI clock, or the Audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

Settings: Internal, MIDI, A/D In

Internal: Synchronization to internal clock. You can use this setting when this tone generator is to be used alone or

as the master clock source for other equipment.

MIDI: Synchronization to a MIDI clock received from an external MIDI instrument via MIDI. Use this setting when the

external sequencer is to be used as master.

A/D In: Synchronization to the tempo of the Audio signal received via the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

Clock Out

Determines whether MIDI clock messages will be transmitted or not.

Settings: Off, On

Tempo Settings

Operation [UTILITY]  [Tempo Settings], [SHIFT] + [ENTER], or

Touch the TEMPO SETTING icon

TEMPO SETTING icon

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Uitlity

Settings

Sound

Quick Setup

Audio I/O

MIDI I/O

Advanced

System

Contents

Load

Store / Save

Data Utility

Tempo Settings

Effect Switch

181

Reference

Mode (Click Mode)

Determines the click sound (metronome) that is used during recording or playback.

Settings: Off, Rec, Rec/Play, Always

Off: The click will not sound.

Rec: The click will sound during Song recording only.

Rec/Play: The click will sound during Song recording and playback.

Always: The click will always sound.

Precount (Click Pre-count)

Determines the number of count-in measures provided before recording actually starts after pressing the

[R] (Play) button while the Song recording.

Settings: Off (Recording starts as soon as the [R] (Play) button is pressed), 1meas – 8meas

NOTE Since the click sound is created with the internal tone generator, using click playback affects the overall

polyphony of the instrument.

Volume (Click Volume)

Determines the click sound volume.

Settings: 0 – 127

Beat (Click Beat)

Determines which beats the metronome click will sound.

Settings: 1/16 (16th notes), 1/8 (8th notes), 1/4 (quarter notes), 1/2 (half notes), Whole (whole notes)

Type (Click Type)

Determines the click sound type.

Settings: 1 – 10

Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value)

Determines the actual timing at which the next Arpeggio playback starts when you trigger it while the

Arpeggio of multiple Parts is played back. When set to “off,” the next Arpeggio starts as soon as you

trigger it. The displayed number indicates the resolution in clocks.

Settings: Off, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),

480 (1/4 note)

Click Out (Click Output Select)

Determines the specified output for the “Click.”

Settings: MainL&R, AsgnL&R, USB1&2…USB29&30, AsgnL, AsgnR, USB1…USB30

MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.

AsgnL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L]/[R] jacks.

USB1&2…USB29&30: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2 – 29&30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

AsgnL: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [L] jack.

AsgnR: Outputs in mono (one channel) to the ASSIGNABLE OUTPUT [R] jack.

USB1 – 30: Outputs in mono (Channels 1 – 30) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Uitlity

Settings

Sound

Quick Setup

Audio I/O

MIDI I/O

Advanced

System

Contents

Load

Store / Save

Data Utility

Tempo Settings

Effect Switch

182

Reference

From the Effect Switch display you can make Effect Bypass settings. None of the settings made on this

display will be stored. When the instrument is restarted, the parameter values are also initialized.

Insertion FX (Insertion Effect Switch)

Determines whether the Insertion Effect is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

System FX (System Effect Switch)

Determines whether the System Effect is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

Master FX (Master Effect Switch)

Determines whether the Master Effect is active or not.

Settings: Off, On

Effect Switch

Operation [UTILITY]  [Effect Switch] or

Touch the EFFECT icon

EFFECT icon

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Live Set

Edit

183

Reference

Live Set

Live Set is a list in which Performances can be freely arranged. Up to 16 Performances can be selected

from the Preset Live Sets and arranged over a single page—making it easy to call up and play your

favorite Performances. For basic instructions on Live Set, see the Owner’s Manual.

Live Set

From the Live Set display you can call up the registered Performances.

Bank (Live Set Bank Select)

Determines the Live Set Bank.

Settings: Preset, User 1 – 8 (default), Library Name (when the Library file is read)

Page (Live Set Page Select)

Determines the Live Set Page.

Settings: Live Set page 1 – 16 (default)

Performance List

Indicates the Performances registered in the selected Live Set.

Category Search

Calls up the Performance Category Search display (page 161).

Current Performance Name

Indicates the selected Performance Name registered in the selected slot.

Current Slot Name

Indicates the selected Slot Name.

Performance Attribute

Indicates the Performance Attribute registered in the selected Slot.

Operation Press the [LIVE SET] button, or

Touch the LIVE SET icon

Performance List

Current Performance Name Current Slot Name Performance Attribute

LIVE SET icon

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Live Set

Edit

184

Reference

Live Set Edit (Edit)

From the Live Set Edit display you can edit the Live Sets (User Bank only).

When the Slot to which a Performance has been registered is selected

Bank (Live Set Bank Name)

Enters the desired name for the selected Live Set Bank. The names can contain up to 20 characters.

Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.

Page (Live Set Page Name)

Enters the desired name of the selected Live Set Page. The names can contain up to 20 characters.

Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.

Done

Touching this parameter finishes the Live Set Editing and returns to the Live Set display.

Performance List

Indicates the Performances registered in the selected Live Set.

Delete

Deletes the Performance from the selected Slot.

Slot Name

Enters the desired name of the selected Slot. The names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the

parameter calls up the input character display.

Performance (Performance Name)

Indicates the Performance Name in the selected Slot.

Color

Determines the Color of the selected Slot.

Settings: Black, Red, Yellow, Green, Blue, Azure, Pink, Orange, Purple, Sakura, Cream, Lime, Aqua, Beige, Mint, Lilac

Volume

Determines the volume of the Performance in the selected Slot.

Operation [LIVE SET]  User Bank selection  [EDIT]

Performance List

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Live Set

Edit

185

Reference

Swap (Swap Switch)

Determines whether the Swap function is turned on or off. You can switch settings between Slots. For

instructions on the Swap function, see the Owner’s Manual.

Settings: Off, On

Copy (Copy Switch)

Determines whether the Copy function is turned on or off. You can copy the setting to another Slot.

Settings: Off, On

When an empty Slot is selected

Add

Touching this button allows you to register the selected Performance in the Slot.

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

Live Set

Edit

186

Reference

Live Set Register (Register)

From the Live Set Register display you can register Performances to the Live Set. For basic instructions on

Live Set Registering, see the Owner’s Manual.

Bank (Live Set Bank Select)

Determines the Live Set Bank for registering Performances. Preset Bank and Library Bank cannot be

selected for this parameter.

Settings: User 1 – 8 (default)

Page (Live Set Page Select)

Determines the Live Set Page for registering Performances.

Settings: Live Set Page 1 – 16 (default)

Slot Select

Determines the Slot for registering Performance. When the Slot containing the Performance is selected

and press the [ENTER] button (or touch the Slot again on the display), the Performance in the slot is

replaced with the currently selected Performance.

Settings: Slot 1 – 16

Operation [SHIFT] + [LIVE SET] (from any operation displays, other than Live Set)

Slot Select

Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance

MONTAGE Reference Manual

iPhone/iPad connection

187

Reference

Connecting an iPhone or iPad

NOTE In order to eliminate the risk of noise from other communication when using this instrument with an iPad or

iPhone app, be sure to turn on Airplane Mode and then turn on Wi-Fi.

NOTICE

Be sure to place your iPad or iPhone on a stable surface to prevent it from falling over and being damaged.

Apps compatible with the MONTAGE provide many more convenient, enjoyable ways to use this musical

instrument.

For details on how to connect the devices, refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual,” which is

available from the Yamaha web site.

NOTE For audio signal transfer, refer to the connection using Lightning to USB Camera Adapter.

Details of compatible smart devices and apps can be found on the following page from the Yamaha web

site.

http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/

Yamaha Web Site (English only)

http://www.yamahasynth.com/

Yamaha Downloads

http://download.yamaha.com/

Manual Development Department

Published 03/2016 MW-A0

Yamaha MONTAGE Reference Manual MONTAGE6/7/8 En Rm A0

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation